Lenze 8246 frequency inverter System Manual

Show HTML Add to My manuals
311 Pages

advertisement

Lenze 8246 frequency inverter System Manual | Manualzz

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDH8200UE

00406193

Manual

S

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

0x

2x

3x

2x

2x

3x

1x

1x

1x

1x

1x

3x

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

C-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

I

D

D1

D2

E

B

C

Contents of the Manual

Part Contents

A

F

Table of contents

Preface and general information

Safety information

Technical data

Installation

Commissioning

During operation

Configuration

Code table for series “Standard”

Code table for series “HVAC”

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Maintenance

Network of several drives

G

H

K

N

O

P

L

M

Application of brake units

Automation

Accessories and motors

Selection help

Application examples

Signal-flow charts

Glossary

Table of keywords

Material number

406181

Edition of

01/99

Note

406182

406183

406184

406185

406186

406187

01/99

01/99

01/99

01/99

01/99

01/99

01/99

02/98

12/96

01/97

11/98

12/96

01/97

06/98

08/96

08/96

11/96

01/99

12/96

11/96

01/99

01/99

01/99

406188

399907

393658

394036

404788

393434

394179

402381

391883

391882

402956

406189

403236

401950

406190

406191

406192

Operating Instructions for regenerative power supply unit 9340

Operating Instructions for brake unit 8250

Operating Instructions for brake unit 9350

Operating Instructions for fieldbus module 2102

Operating Instructions for fieldbus module 2111

Operating Instructions for fieldbus module 2131

Operating Instructions for fieldbus module 2171/2172

Operating Instructions PTC input module 8274

Operating Instructions I/O module 8275

Flyer: PC software Global Drive Control

Overview

Catalog: Frequency inverter 8200

Flyer: Three-phase AC motors

Show/Hide Bookmarks

8 2 0 X / 8 2 1 X

L e n z e

P o s t f a c h 1 0 1 3 5 2 , 3 1 7 6 3 H A M E L N

C o n t r o l T e r m i n a l s

8 2 2 X / 8 2 4 X

S c r e e n - s h e e t m a i n s c o n n e c t i o n

M a i n s c o n n e c t i o n a n d

D C c o n n e c t i o n

L 1 L 2 L 3 + U G - U G

P E

P A R 2 0 V L V I M A X D B T E M P

P A R 1

S E T

L O A D

H z

S H P R G

S T P

R U N

D e t a c h a b l e o p e r a t i n g m o d u l e , a s a l t e r n a t i v e

F i e l d b u s

I N T E R B U S

C o n t r o l t e r m i n a l s

M a i n s - / M o t o r c o n n e c t i o n

S c r e e n c o n n e c t i o n

T 1 T 2

P E

S c r e e n - s h e e t c o n t r o l c o n n e c t i o n s

T h e r m a l - c o n t a c t c o n n e c t i o n

M o t o r c o n n e c t i o n

S c r e e n - s h e e t m o t o r c a b l e s

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part A

1 Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1

How to use this Manual

1.1.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2

Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3

Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4

EC Directives/Declaration of Conformity

1.4.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What is the purpose of EC directives?

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.2

1.4.3

1.4.4

1.4.5

What does the CE mark imply?

EC Low-Voltage Directive

EC Machinery Directive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EC Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2

Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3

Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-3

1-4

1-4

1-4

1-5

1-7

1-11

2-1

2-1

2-2

2-2

8200SHB0199 i

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part B

3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1

Overview of types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3

General data/application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

Rated data (Operation with 150 % overload)

3.4.1

Types 8201 to 8204

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.2

3.4.3

Types 8211 to 8214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 8215 to 8218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.4

3.4.5

3.4.6

3.4.7

Types 8221 to 8224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 8225 to 8227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 8241 to 8243

Types 8244 to 8246

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5

Rated data (Operation with 120 % overload) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1

3.5.2

3.5.3

3.5.4

Operating conditions

Types 821X

Types 822X

Types 824X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6

Fuses and cable cross-sections

3.6.1

3.6.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation of controllers in UL-approved systems

3.6.1.1

Protection of the motor cables

Single drives with 150 % overload

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3

Single drives with 120 % overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7

Analog plug-in module 8279IB

3.7.1

Features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1

Analog plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

3-1

3-2

3-4

3-5

3-5

3-6

3-8

3-10

3-12

3-14

3-16

3-18

3-18

3-18

3-19

3-20

3-21

3-21

3-21

3-22

3-23

3-24

3-24

3-25

3-25

ii

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1

Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1

4.1.2

Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets

4.1.2.1

Types 8201 to 8204

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.2.2

4.1.2.3

4.1.2.4

4.1.2.5

4.1.2.6

Type 8202-V002 (reduced assembly depth)

Types 8211 to 8214

Types 8215 to 8218

Types 8221 to 8227

Types 8241 to 8246

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.3

4.1.4

4.1.5

4.1.6

4.1.7

DIN-rail assembly

4.1.3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 8201 to 8204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.3.2

Types 8211 to 8214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly with thermally separated power stage

(”push-through technique”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.4.1

4.1.4.2

4.1.4.3

Types 8215 to 8218

Types 8221 to 8227

Types 8241 to 8246

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly of the variant 82XX-V003 ”cold plate”

4.1.5.1

General

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.5.2

4.1.5.3

4.1.5.4

4.1.5.5

4.1.5.6

4.1.5.7

Demands on the cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermal performance of the system

Assembly preparations

Assembly of 822X-C-V003

Assembly of 824X-C-V003

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly of 821X-C-V003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly with mains filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assembly of the analog plug-in module 8279IB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2

Electrical installation

4.2.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator’s safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.2

Protection of the controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.3

4.2.4

4.2.5

4.2.6

4.2.7

Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mains types/mains conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Combination with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.8

Specification of the cables used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power connections

4.2.7.1

4.2.7.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mains connection

Motor connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.7.3

4.2.7.4

4.2.7.5

4.2.7.6

Connection of a brake unit

Connection plan 820X

Connection plan 821X

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connection plan 822X/824X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control connections

4.2.8.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.8.2

4.2.8.3

4.2.8.4

Assignment of the control terminals

Connection diagrams

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connection diagrams: Analog plug-in module . . . . . . . .

4.3

Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-25

4-25

4-26

4-26

4-27

4-27

4-27

4-28

4-28

4-29

4-34

4-35

4-36

4-37

4-38

4-38

4-38

4-41

4-42

4-43

4-10

4-11

4-12

4-13

4-14

4-14

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-18

4-21

4-22

4-23

4-24

4-1

4-1

4-1

4-3

4-3

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-8

4-9

8200SHB0199 iii

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part C

5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1

Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2

Short commissioning (factory setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1

5.2.2

Switch-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Factory setting of the most important drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3

Adapt machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1

Determine speed range (fdmin, fdmax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.2

5.3.3

Setting of acceleration and deceleration times (Tir, Tif) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting of current limit values (Imax limits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4

Optimisation of the operating behaviour

5.4.1

Select control mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.2

Optimising operating modes

5.4.2.1

5.4.2.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimising motor-current control (C014 = -4-) . . . . . . .

Optimise V/f-characteristic control with auto boost

(C014 = -0-/-1-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.2.3

5.4.2.4

Optimise V/f-characteristic control with constant Vmin boost

(C014 = -2-/-3-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Normalisation of an application datum . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3

Operation with PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5

Application examples for PID controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.1

5.5.2

Pump application with pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pump application with level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5.3

5.5.4

Dancer-position control (line drive)

Air conditioning system

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 During operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1

Operating information

6.1.1

6.1.2

6.1.3

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

822X/824X

8218-V003

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2

Display of the controller status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-10

5-12

5-15

5-16

5-18

5-18

5-21

5-23

5-26

6-1

6-1

6-1

6-2

6-2

6-2

5-1

5-6

5-6

5-8

5-8

5-3

5-3

5-4

5-5

5-1

5-2

5-2

5-2

iv

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part D

7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1

8201BB operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2

Structure of the operating program

7.2.1

7.2.2

7.2.3

Operating level

Code level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameter level

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3

Change and store parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3.1

7.3.2

7.3.3

Change and store parameters with the 8201BB operating module

Change and store parameters with fieldbus modules.

Dynamic parameter change

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4

Operating functions

7.4.1

7.4.2

7.4.3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working with parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change parameter set via DC-bus voltage

7.4.3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC-motor braking by means of parameter set changeover

7.4.3.2

Automatic parameter set changeover for controlled

deceleration in the event of mains failure . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5

Control functions

7.5.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed range (fdmin, fdmax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.2

Acceleration and deceleration times Tir, Tif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.3

7.5.4

7.5.5

7.5.6

Current limit values (Imax limit values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Current limitation controller (Imax controller)

Control mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V/f characteristic

7.5.6.1

7.5.6.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V/f-rated frequency fdr

Vmin setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.7

7.5.8

7.5.9

7.5.10

7.5.11

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor data detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running optimisation

7.5.9.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.9.2

7.5.9.3

7.5.9.4

7.5.9.5

Chopper frequency

Oscillation damping

Ramp function generator S-shape

Skip frequencies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PID controller as process controller

7.5.10.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset integral component and influence . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.10.2

7.5.10.3

7.5.10.4

Setpoint selection for the process controller

Frequency precontrol

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frequency setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setpoint input

7.5.11.1

7.5.11.2

7.5.11.3

7.5.11.4

7.5.11.5

7.5.11.6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog setpoint input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setpoint input using the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setpoint input via JOG frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setpoint input via function ”Motor potentiometer” . . . . . .

Setpoint input via of the function ”Motor potentiometer in

combination with JOG value”

Setpoint sum

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-13

7-26

7-27

7-28

7-28

7-29

7-31

7-32

7-33

7-34

7-38

7-38

7-39

7-39

7-40

7-40

7-42

7-43

7-44

7-15

7-15

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-19

7-22

7-22

7-24

7-46

7-47

7-1

7-9

7-9

7-10

7-12

7-12

7-5

7-6

7-8

7-8

7-2

7-4

7-4

7-4

7-5

8200SHB0199 v

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

7.5.12

7.5.13

7.5.14

7.5.15

Controller enable RFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start conditions/flying-restart circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function of the inputs to be configured block by block

7.5.14.1

Level inversion for digital inputs

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.14.2

7.5.14.3

7.5.14.4

7.5.14.5

Priority mask for digital inputs

Change of the direction of rotation (CW/CCW)

Quick stop QSP

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC-injection brake (DCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.14.6

7.5.14.7

7.5.14.8

7.5.14.9

Parameter set changeover PAR

TRIP set

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual/remote changeover

Digital frequency input

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indirect torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6

Display functions

7.6.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.2

7.6.3

7.6.4

7.6.5

Switch-on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Normalisation of an application datum

Elapsed operating time meter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Software version and controller type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7

Monitoring functions

7.7.1

7.7.2

7.7.3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Relay outputs

Analog output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7.4

Thermal motor monitoring

7.7.3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I2 x t monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7.3.2

PTC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor-phase failure detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part D1

7.8

Code table for “Standard” series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part D2

7.9

Code table for “HVAC” series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-62

7-62

7-62

7-63

7-64

7-64

7-48

7-49

7-50

7-52

7-53

7-54

7-55

7-56

7-58

7-58

7-59

7-60

7-61

7-65

7-65

7-69

7-71

7-71

7-72

7-73

7-77

7-85

vi

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part E

8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.1

8.1.2

8.1.3

Display at the controller

Maloperation of the drive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display at the operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2

Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3

Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.4

Reset of fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2

Service addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part F

10 Network of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2

Conditions for trouble-free network operation

10.2.1

Possible combinations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.2

Mains connection

10.2.2.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cable protection/cable cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.2.2

10.2.2.3

Mains choke/mains filter

Controller protection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC-bus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.3

10.2.4

10.2.5

Fuses and cable cross-sections for a network of several drives

Protection in networks of several drives

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3

Selection basics

10.3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3.2

Selection example for 4 drives

10.3.2.1

10.3.2.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supply only via controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supply by means of 934X supply and feedback module .

10.4

Central supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4.1

10.4.2

Central supply of 820X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central supply via 934X for 821X/822X/824X/93XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5

Decentral supply

10.5.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decentral supply for 820X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5.2

Central supply for 821X/822X/824X/93XX/934X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

See also table of contents of the attached Operating Instructions

10-1

10-9

10-9

10-12

10-12

10-13

10-14

10-14

10-15

10-16

10-16

10-17

10-1

10-2

10-2

10-3

10-3

10-3

10-3

10-4

10-6

10-7

8-1

8-1

8-1

8-1

8-2

8-2

8-2

8-4

9-1

9-1

9-2

8200SHB0199 vii

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part G

11 Application of brake units

See: Table of contents of the attached Operating Instructions

Part H

12 Automation

See: Table of contents of the attached Operating Instructions

Part I

13 Accessories (Survey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.1

Accessories for all types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3

Type-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.1

13.3.2

Types 820X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 821X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.3

13.3.4

Types 822X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types 824X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part K

14 Selection help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.1

Pump application with pressure control

15.2

Pump application with level control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.3

Dancer-position control (line drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.4

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1

13-1

13-1

13-2

13-2

13-3

13-4

13-5

14-1

15-1

15-1

15-4

15-6

15-8

viii

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents

Part L

16 Signal-flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1

Signal-flow chart for types 820X

16.1.1

16.1.2

16.1.3

Control structure

Inverter control

Monitorings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2

Signal-flow charts for types 821X/822X/824X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2.1

Control structure control mode V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.2.2

16.2.3

16.2.4

Control structure control mode motor current control

Inverter control

Monitorings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.3

Signal-flow charts for types 821X/822X/824X-HVAC

16.3.1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Process and speed controller for C005 = -0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.3.2

Process and speed controller for C005 = -1- ... -7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part M

17 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18 Table of keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-1

16-2

16-2

16-3

16-3

16-4

16-4

16-5

16-6

16-6

16-7

16-7

16-8

17-1

18-1

8200SHB0199 ix

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Contents x

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--A

00406181

Manual

Part A

Table of contents

Preface and general information

Safety information

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1 Preface and general information

1.1

1.1.1

How to use this Manual

-

This Manual completes the Operating Instructions for 82XX frequency inverters.

-

It contains the Operating Instructions and additional information on planning, adaptability and the accessories valid at the time of printing.

- In case of doubt, refer to the Operating Instructions delivered with the

82XX frequency inverters.

-

The Manual is a help to select and adapt the 82XX frequency inverters and the accessories to ensure safe and trouble-free operation. It contains safety information which must be observed.

-

The Manual must always be in a complete and perfectly readable state.

Terminology used

Term

82XX

Controllers

Drive system

In the following text used for

Any frequency inverter of the series 8200, 8210, 8220, 8240

82XX frequency inverter

Drive systems with 82XX frequency inverters and other Lenze drive components

1.2

Scope of delivery

Scope of delivery

-

-

-

1 82XX frequency inverter

1 Operating Instructions

1 accessory kit (components and pieces for mechanical and electrical installation)

Important

After reception of the delivery, check immediately whether the scope of supply matches the accompanying papers. Lenze does not accept any liability for deficiencies claimed subsequently.

-

-

Claim visible transport damage immediately to the forwarder.

visible deficiencies/incompleteness immediately to your Lenze representative.

8200SHB0199

1-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

7-pole socket connectors for control cables

3-pole socket connectors for relay output K2

Fixing rails

Fixing units incl. screws for fixing the inverter to the housing

PG diaphragm gland 21

Screen sheet for control cables incl. fixing screw

Screen sheet for motor cable incl. two fixing screws

Hexagon nuts incl. washers and spring-lock washers for the electrical connection of the power stage

Heat-conducting paste

Gasket

Tightening frame

820X 821X 821X-V003 8221

8222

8223

2 2 2 2

Accessory kit

8224

8225

8226

8227

2 2

-

2

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2

-

-

-

-

-

1 tube

1

1

1

-

4

1

1

1

8 M6

-

-

-

1

-

4

1

1

1

8 M8

-

-

-

1

-

-

1

1

1

8 M10

-

-

-

8221-V003

8222-V003

824X 824X-V003

2

1

-

-

1

1

1

8 M6

1 tube

1

2

2

1

2

-

-

1

1

-

-

-

-

2

1

-

-

-

1

1

-

1 tube

1

2

1-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.3

Legal regulations

Identification Nameplate

Application as directed

CE-identification Manufacturer

Lenze controllers are unambiguously designated by the contents of the nameplate.

Conforms to the EC Low Voltage

Directive

Lenze GmbH & Co KG

Postfach 101352

D-31763 Hameln

-

-

82XX frequency inverter operate the controller only under the conditions prescribed in these operating instructions.

are components

- for open and closed looped control of variable speed drives with asynchronous standard motors, reluctance motors, PM synchronous motors with asynchronous damper cage,

- for installation into a machine,

- used for assembly together with other components to form a machine.

-

are electric units for the installation into control cabinets or similar enclosed operating housing.

comply with the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive.

are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.

are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.

Drive systems with 82XX frequency inverters

meet the EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive if they are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.

can be used

- on public and non-public mains,

- in industrial as well as residential and commercial premises.

The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.

Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!

Liability

Warranty

The information, data, and notes in these instructions met the state of the art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to controllers which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information, illustrations, and descriptions.

The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these instructions are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit proposals.

-

-

The specifications in these instructions describe the product features without guaranteeing them.

Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference caused by:

- disregarding the operating instructions

- unauthorised modifications to the controller

- operating errors

- improper working on and with the controller

-

-

-

Warranty conditions: See Sales and Delivery Conditions of Lenze GmbH & Co KG.

Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the deficiency or fault.

The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.

Material

Metal

Plastic

Assembled PCBs

Recycle

-

-

-

Dispose

-

-

-

8200SHB0199

1-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.4

EC Directives/Declaration of Conformity

1.4.1

1.4.2

What is the purpose of EC directives?

EC directives are issued by the European Council and are intended for the determination of common technical requirements (harmonisation)and certification procedures within the European Community. At the moment, there are 21 EC directives of product ranges. The directives are or will be converted to national laws of the member states. A certification issued by one member state is valid automatically without any further approval in all other member states.

The texts of the directive are restricted to the essential requirements. Technical details are or will be determined by European harmonised standards.

What does the CE mark imply?

After a verification, the conformity according to the EC directives is certified by affixing a CE mark. Within the EC there are no commercial barriers for a product with the CE mark.

The enclosure of a conformity certification is not necessary according to most directives. Therefore, the customer is not able to appreciate which of the 21 EC directives applies to a product and which harmonised standards are considered in the conformity verification.

Controllers on their own with the CE mark exclusively correspond to the Low

Voltage Directive. For the compliance with the EMC Directive only general recommendations have been issued so far. The CE conformity of the installed machine remains the responsibility of the user. For the installation of CE-typical drive systems, Lenze has already proved the CE conformity to the EMC Directive.

1-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.4.3

EC Low-Voltage Directive

(73/23/EEC) amended by: CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

General

-

The Low-Voltage Directive is effective for all electrical equipment for use with a rated voltage between 50 V and 1000 V AC and between 75 V and

1500 V DC, and under normal ambient conditions. The use of e.g. electrical equipment in explosive atmospheres and electrical parts in passenger and goods lifts are excepted.

-

The objective of the Low Voltage Directive is to ensure that only electrical equipment which does not endanger the safety of persons or animals is placed on the market. It should also be designed to conserve material assets.

8200SHB0199

1-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

EC Declaration of Conformity ’95

for the purpose of the EC Low-Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) amended by: CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

820X/821X/822X/824X controllers are developed, designed, and manufactured in compliance with the above mentioned EC Directive under the sole responsibility of

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln

Standards considered:

Standard

DIN VDE 0160 5.88 + A1 / 4.89 + A2 /10.88

DIN EN 50178

Classification VDE 0160 / 11.94

DIN VDE 0100

EN 60529

IEC 249 / 1 10/86, IEC 249 / 2-15 / 12/89

IEC 326 / 1 10/90, EN 60097 / 9.93

DIN VDE 0110 /1-2 /1/89 /20/ 8/90

Hameln, 01 October, 1995

Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations

Standards for the installation of power installations

IP degrees of protection

Base material for printed circuits

Printed circuits, printed boards

Creepace distances and clearances

________________

(i. V. Loy)

Product Manager

1-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.4.4

EC Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility

(89/336/EEC) amended by: First Amendment Directive (92/31/EEC)

CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

General

-

The EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is effective for ”devices” which may cause electromagnetic interference or the operation of which may be impaired by such interference.

-

The aim is to limit the generation of electromagnetic interference so that an operation without interference to radio and telecommunication systems and other equipment is possible. The devices must also show an appropriate resistance against electromagnetic interference to ensure the application as directed.

-

Controllers cannot be driven in stand-alone operation and therefore the controllers cannot be evaluated on their own in terms of EMC. Only after the integration of the controllers into a drive system, can this system be tested concerning the objectives of the EC EMC Directive and the compliance with the ”Law about the Electromagnetic Compatibility of Devices”.

-

Lenze has verified the conformity of controllers integrated into certain defined drive systems. In the following these systems are called ”CE-typical drive systems”.

The following configurations can now be selected by the user:

- The user himself can determine the system components and their integration into the drive system and is then held responsible for the conformity of the drive.

- The user can select the CE-typcial drive systems for which the manufacturer has already proved the conformity.

8200SHB0199

1-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

Components of the CE-typical drive system

System component

Controller

RFI filter

Mains choke

Mains filters

Motor cable

Mains cable between RFI filter and controller

Control cables

Motor

Accessories

Specification

820X/821X/822X/824X controllers

For type designation see inner cover page

For data and data assignment, see chapter ”Accessories”

For data and data assignment, see chapter ”Accessories”

For data and data assignment, see chapter ”Accessories”

Screened power cable with tinned E-CU braid with a minimum of 85 % optical coverage

As from cable length 300 mm:

Screened power cable with tinned E-CU braid with a minimum of 85 % optical coverage

Screened signal cable type LIYCY

Standard three-phase AC asynchronous motor

Lenze type DXRA or similar

For rated accessories, see inner cover page.

-

Controller, RFI filter and mains choke are mounted on one assembly board.

-

The system components are functionally wired according to chapter 4,

”Electrical installation”.

Application as directed/Scope of application

-

The 820X/821X/822X/824X controllers are intended for the use in control cabinets.

-

The 820X/821X/822X/824X controllers are directed as components for the control of variable-speed drives with three-phase AC motors to be assembled together with other components to form a drive system.

The drive systems are intended for installation into a machine or for the construction together with other components to form a machine or a plant.

-

Drive systems with the 820X/821X/822X/824X controllers, which are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems, correspond to the EC EMC Directive and the standards mentioned below.

-

The CE-typical drive systems are suitable for the operation on public and non-public mains.

The CE-typical drive systems are provided for the operation in industrial premises as well as in residential and commercial areas.

-

Because of the earth-potential reference of the RFI filters, the described

CE-typical drive systems are not suitable for the connection to IT-mains

(mains without earth-reference potential).

-

The controllers are not domestic appliances, but they are intended as a part of drive systems for commercial use.

1-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

EC Declaration of Conformity ’95 for the purpose of the EC

Directive

on Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC) amended by: First Amendment Directive (92/31/EEC)

CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

820X/821X/822X/824X controllers cannot be driven in stand-alone operation for the purpose of the Regulation about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMVG of

9/11/92 and 1. EMVGÄndG of 08 August, 1995). The EMC can only be verified when the controller is integrated into a drive system.

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln declares that the described ”CE-typical drive systems” with the controllers of the types 820X/821X/822X/824X comply with the above mentioned EC Directive.

The conformity evaluation is based on the working paper of the product standard for drive systems:

IEC 22G-WG4 5/94 EMC product standard including specific test methods for power drive systems”

Generic standards considered:

Generic standard

EN 50081-1 /92

EN 50081-2 /93

(used in addition to the requirements of IEC 22G) prEN 50082-2 3/94

Generic standard for the emission of noise

Part 1: Residential area, commercial premises, and small businesses

Generic standard for the emission of noise

Part 2: Industrial premises

The emission of noise in industrial premises is not limited in IEC 22G.

Generic standard for noise immunity

Part 2: Industrial premises

The requirements of noise immunity for residential areas were not considered since they are less strict.

8200SHB0199

1-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

Considered basic standards for the test of noise emission:

Basic standard

EN 55022 7/92

EN 55011 7/92

(used in addition to the requirements of IEC 22G)

IEC 801-2 /91

IEC 1000-4-3

ENV 50140 /93

IEC 801-4 /88

IEC 801-5

Test

Radio interference housing and mains

Frequency range 0.15 - 1000 MHz

Radio interference housing and mains

Frequency range 0.15 - 1000 MHz

The emission of noise in industrial premises is not limited in IEC 22G.

Electrostatic discharge on housing and heat sink

Electromagnetic fields

Frequency range 26 - 1000 MHz

High-frequency field

Frequency range 80 - 1000 MHz,

80 % amplitude modulated

Fixed frequency

900 MHz with 200 Hz, 100 % modulated

Fast transients burst on power terminals

Burst on bus and control cables

Surge test

Mains cables

Limit value

Class B for use in residential areas and commercial premises

Class A for use in industrial premesis

Severity 3

6 kV with contact discharge

8 kV air discharge

Severity 3

10 V/m

Severity 3

10 V/m

10 V/m

Severity 3

2 kV / 5 kHz

Severity 4

2 kV / 5 kHz

Installation class 3

Hameln, 01 October, 1995

________________

(i. V. Loy)

Product Manager

1-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

1.4.5

EC Machinery Directive

(89/392/EEC) amended by: First Amendment Directive (91/368/EEC)

Second Amendment Directive (93/44/EEC)

CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

General

For the purpose of the Machinery Directive, ”machinery” means an assembly of linked parts or components, at least one of which moves, with the appropriate actuators, control and power circuits, etc., joined together for a specific application, in particular for the processing, treatment, moving or packaging of a material.

8200SHB0199

1-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Preface and general information

EC Manufacturer’s Declaration

for the purpose of the EC Machinery Directive (98/392/EEC) amended by: First Amendment Directive (91/368/EEC)

Second Amendment Directive (93/44/EEC)

CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)

The 820X/821X/822X/824X controllers were developed, designed, and manufactured under the sole responsibility of

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln

Commissioning of the controllers is prohibited until it is proven that the machine in which they are to be installed corresponds to the EC Machinery Directive.

Hameln, 01 October, 1995

________________

(i. V. Loy)

Product Manager

1-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information

2 Safety information

2.1

General safety information

Safety and application notes for controllers

(to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)

1. General

During operation, drive controllers may have, according to their type of protection, live, bare, in some cases also movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.

Non-authorised removal of the required cover, inappropriate use, incorrect installation or operation, creates the risk of severe injury to persons or damage to material assets.

Further information can be obtained from the documentation.

All operations concerning transport, installation, and commissioning as well as maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled personnel (IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or DIN

VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national regulations for the prevention of accidents must be observed).

According to this basic safety information qualified skilled personnel are persons who are familiar with the erection, assembly, commissioning, and operation of the product and who have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.

2. Application as directed

Drive controllers are components which are designed for installation in electrical systems or machinery.

When installing in machines, commissioning of the drive controllers (i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine corresponds to the regulations of the EC Directive 89/392/EEC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.

Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only allowed when there is compliance with the EMC Directive

(89/336/EEC).

The drive controllers meet the requirements of the Low Voltage

Directive 73/23/EEC. The harmonised standards of the EN 50178/

DIN VDE 0160 series together with EN 60439-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146/DIN VDE 0558 are applicable to drive controllers.

The technical data and information on the connection conditions must be obtained from the nameplate and the documentation and must be observed in all cases.

3. Transport, storage

Notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be observed.

Climatic conditions must be observed according to EN 50178.

4. Erection

The devices must be erected and cooled according to the regulations of the corresponding documentation.

The drive controllers must be protected from inappropriate loads.

Particularly during transport and handling, components must not be bent and/or isolating distances must not be changed. Touching of electronic components and contacts must be avoided.

Drive controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components which can easily be damaged by inappropriate handling. Electrical components must not be damaged or destroyed mechanically

(health risks are possible!).

5. Electrical connection

When working on live drive controllers, the valid national regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must be observed.

The electrical installation must be carried out according to the appropriate regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE connection). More detailed information is included in the documentation.

Notes concerning the installation in compliance with EMC - such as screening, grounding, arrangement of filters and laying of cables - are included in the documentation of the drive controllers.

These notes must also be observed in all cases for drive controllers with the CE mark. The compliance with the required limit values demanded by the EMC legislation is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine.

6. Operation

Systems where drive controllers are installed must be equipped, if necessary, with additional monitoring and protective devices according to the valid safety regulations, e.g. law on technical tools, regulations for the prevention of accidents, etc.

Modifications of the drive controllers by the operating software are allowed.

After disconnecting the drive controllers from the supply voltage, live parts of the controller and power connections must not be touched immediately, because of possibly charged capacitors. For this, observe the corresponding labels on the drive controllers.

During operation, all covers and doors must be closed.

7. Maintenance and servicing

The manufacturer’s documentation must be observed.

This safety information must be kept!

The product-specific safety and application notes in these Operating Instructions must also be observed!

8200SHB0199

2-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Safety information

2.2

Layout of the safety information

-

All safety information has a uniform layout:

- The icon characterises the type of danger.

- The signal word characterises the severity of danger.

- The note describes the danger and suggests how to avoid the danger.

Signal word

Note

Warning of danger to persons

Warning of damage to material

Other notes

Icons used

Warning of hazardous electrical voltage

Warning of a general danger

Signal words

Danger!

Warns of impending dange U .

Consequences if disregarded:

Death or severe injuries.

Warning!

Warns of potential, very hazardous situations.

Possible consequences if disregarded:

Death or severe injuries.

Caution!

Warns of potential, hazardous situations .

Possible consequences if disregarded:

Light or minor injuries.

Stop!

Note!

Warns of potential damage to material .

Possible consequences if disregarded:

Damage of the controller/drive system or its environment .

Designates a general, useful note.

If this note is observed, handling of the controller/drive system is easier.

2.3

Residual hazards

Operator’s safety After mains disconnection, the power terminals U, V, W and + U

G

, -U

G

remain live for at least 3 minutes.

Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to the power terminals.

Protection of devices Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage at L1, L2, L3 or + U

G

, + U

G overload the internal input current limit.

may

Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.

Overspeeds Drive systems can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting high field frequencies for motors and machines which are not suitable):

The controllers do not offer any protection against these operating conditions. Use additional components for this.

2-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--B

00406182

Manual

Part B

Technical data

Installation

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3 Technical data

3.1

Overview of types

3.0

2.2

1.5

0.75

0.75

0.55

30

22

15

11

7.5

5.5

4.0

Motor power (4-pole ASM 230/400V) kW

90 8227

75 8226

55

45

8225

8224

8223

8222

8221

8204

8203

8202

8218

8217

8216

8215

8214

8213

8212

8211

0.37

8201

L1/N/PE

AC 220/230V

Rated voltage

L1/L2/L3/PE

AC 400/460V

L1/L2/L3/PE

AC 400/480V

Frame size

8246

8245

8244

8243

8242

8241

L1/L2/L3/PE

AC 400/480V

FIG 3-1 Overview of types

8200SHB0199

3-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.2

Features

Compact design

Load capacity of up to 150 % I r for 1 min

Inverter outputs are protected against short circuit

Earth-fault check at mains connection

Chopper frequency 9.2 kHz

Chopper frequency selectable: 4 kHz, 8 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz

V/f-characteristic control with constant V min boost or auto boost

Motor-current control or V/f-characteristic control selectable

Mains-voltage compensation

Slip compensation

Adjustable current limitation with V/f-override

PWM converter with IGBT-power stages

DC-bus connection and brake-chopper connection

Isolated analog input and output

Relay outputs (change-over contact)

PLC-compatible digital outputs (I/O module 8275)

Isolated digital inputs with programmable functions

Up to 3 JOG frequencies per parameter set

DC-injection brake

TRIP set and TRIP reset function

Motor potentiometer

Output frequency up to 240 Hz / 480 Hz

Output frequency up to 480 Hz

Flying restart circuit

2 parameter sets

Elapsed time meter

Assembly with thermal separation of the power stage

Temperature-dependent blower activation

PTC monitoring of the motor by integrated evaluation

Process and speed controller

Setpoint summation

Level inversion for digital inputs

Priority for digital inputs

Manual/remote changeover (H/Re)

Belt monitoring

Selection of an inverse analog setpoint

Limit frequencies

Ramp function generator S-shape

Motor phase failure detection

820X

/

/

/

/

/

821X

/

/

/

/

822X

/

/

/

/

824X

/

/

/

/

/ / /

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

1

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

1

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

2

3 (option) 3 (option) 3 (option) 3 (option)

4

/

4

/

4

/

4

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/ as from

8215E

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/ option option

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/ *

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/

/

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/ *

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/ *

/

/

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/ *

/ *

/ *

/ *

/

*

/ *

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

2

3-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

Attachable accessories

8201BB operating module for control and parameter setting with memory for parameter-set transmission

Serial 2102IB LECOM fieldbus module for RS232/485 or optical fibre

INTERBUS 2111IB fieldbus module

2171 system bus module (CAN)

I/O module 8275 IB

PTC module 8274 IB

Monitor module 8276 IB

Bipolar analog input 8278 IB

Analog plug-in module 8279IB (2. analog channel)

* Only for 821X/2X/4X HVAC (V020) controllers.

820X

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

821X

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/ *

822X

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/ *

824X

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/ *

8200SHB0199

3-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.3

Permissible installation height

Degree of pollution

Noise emission

Noise immunity

Insulation strength

Packaging to DIN 4180

Enclosure

Approvals

General data/application conditions

Field

Vibration resistance

Humidity class

Values

Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions

Humidity class F without condensation (average relative humidity 85 %)

During transport of the controller:

During storage of the controller:

During operation of the controller:

-25 • C ¡ + 70 • C

-25 • C ¡ + 55 • C

0 • C ¡ + 40 • C

+ 40 • C ¡ + 50 • C h $ 1000 m a.m.s.l.

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.

VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2 without power derating with power derating without power derating with power derating

Requirements to EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21

Limit value class A to EN 55011 (industry) with mains filter

Limit value class B to EN 55022 (residential area) with mains filter and installation into control cabinet

Limit values maintained with mains filter

Requirements to EN 50082-2, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21

Requirements

ESD

Standard

EN61000-4-2

RF interference (enclosure)

Burst

Surge

(Surge on mains cable)

EN61000-4-3

EN61000-4-4

IEC 1000-4-5

Severities

3, i.e. 8 kV with air discharge,

6 kV with contact discharge

3, i.e. 10 V/m; 27 ¡ 1000 MHz

3/4, i.e. 2 kV/5 kHz

3, i.e. 1.2/50 ³ s,

1 kV phase-phase,

2 kV phase-PE

Overvoltage category III to VDE 0110

Types 820X, 821X, 824X

Types 822X,

821X/2X/4X HVAC (V020)

Types 82XX, 82XX HVAC (V020)

Dust packaging

Transport packaging

Types 8215 - 8218, 822X, 824X,

8215/16/17/18/2X/4X HVAC (V020)

Types 82XX, 82XX HVAC (V020)

Types 822X, 824X,

822X/4X HVAC (V020)

IP20

NEMA 1: Protection against contact

IP41 on the heat-sink side with thermal separation in push-through technique

CE:

UL 508:

UL 508C:

Low-Voltage Directive and

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Industrial Control Equipment

Power Conversion Equipment

3-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4

Rated data

(Operation with 150 % overload)

3.4.1

Types 8201 to 8204

150 % overload Type

Order No.

Type

8201

EVF8201-E

8202

EVF8202-E

8202-V002

8203

EVF8203-E

8204

EVF8204-E

Output power U, V, W at 9.2 kHz*

Order No.

P r

[hp]

S r9.2

[kVA]

0.5

1.0

EVF8202-E- V002

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

V r

[V]

V

DC

[V]

190 V -0 % $ V r

$ 260 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0%

270 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 360 V + 0 %

Mains current 4) with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

[A]

4.2

5.0

Data for mains operation with 1 AC / 230 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz; 270 V $ V

DC

P r

[kW] 0.37

$

7.5

9.0

275 V

0.75

12.5

15.0

1.5

17.0

-

2.2

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.7

2.9

3.6

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

Output current

P

DC

I r

[kW]

[A]

0.0

2.6

0.0

4.0

0.0

7.0

0.0

9.5

Max. output current for 60 s 2)

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I r

)

I rmax

V

M

[A]

[V]

P loss

[W]

3.9

6.0

10.5

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 240 Hz

14.2

Power derating [%/K]

[%/m]

30 50 70

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

100

Resolution

Digital setpoint selection

Absolute

Accuracy

0.05 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level, 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

Weight

Offset m [kg] 1.0

á 0.3 %

1.3

Variant 1.0

2.2

2.2

1) This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I r

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4) Observe the N-conduction load when having a symmetrical mains distribution! (See electrical installation)

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.2

Types 8211 to 8214

150 % overload Type 8211 8212 8213 8214

Variant “HVAC”

Order No.

Type

EVF8211-E

8211-V020

EVF8212-E

8212-V020

EVF8213-E

8213-V020

EVF8214-E

8214-V020

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

Order No.

V

V r

DC

[V]

[V]

EVF8211-E-V020 EVF8212-E-V020 EVF8213-E-V020 EVF8214-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 510 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0%

450 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 715 V + 0 %

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

I mains

[A]

[A]

2.5

3.75

3.9

5.85

5.0

7.5

7.0

--

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 450 V $ V

DC

3 AC/460 V/50 Hz/60 Hz; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 725 V 400 V

$

460 V

650 V or

400 V 460 V 400 V 460 V 400 V 460 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

0.75

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.5

2.0

1.5

2.0

2.2

2.9

2.2

2.9

3.0

4.0

3.7

5.0

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz*

S r8

[kVA] 1.6

1.9

2.7

3.1

3.8

4.3

5.2

5.8

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1) P

DC

[kW] 0.7

0.7

0.0

0.0

1.0

1.0

0.0

0.0

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz*

Noise optimised 8 kHz*

4)

4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

I rmax4

[A]

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

2.4

2.4

2.0

1.8

2.4

2.1

1.9

1.6

3.6

3.6

3.0

2.7

3.6

3.1

2.9

2.4

2.4

2.4

1.9

1.7

2.3

2.0

1.8

1.5

3.6

3.6

2.8

2.5

3.7

2.9

2.7

2.1

3.9

3.9

3.3

2.9

3.9

3.4

3.1

2.5

5.9

5.9

4.9

4.4

5.9

5.1

4.7

3.8

3.9

3.9

3.0

2.7

3.7

3.2

2.9

2.3

5.9

5.9

4.6

4.1

5.6

4.8

4.4

3.5

5.5

5.5

4.6

4.1

5.5

4.7

4.4

3.6

8.3

8.3

6.9

6.2

8.3

7.1

6.6

5.4

5.5

5.5

4.3

3.8

5.2

4.5

4.1

3.3

8.3

8.3

6.6

5.8

7.8

6.7

6.2

5.0

7.3

7.3

6.1

5.5

7.3

6.3

5.8

4.7

11.0

11.0

9.2

8.2

11.0

9.4

8.8

7.1

7.3

7.3

5.7

5.1

6.9

6.0

5.4

4.4

11.0

11.0

8.7

7.7

10.4

8.9

8.2

6.6

3-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload Type

Variant “HVAC”

Order No.

Type

Motor voltage

Weight

3)

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

Power derating

Order No.

V

M

[V]

P loss

[W]

[%/K]

[%/m]

Resolution Absolute

Accuracy

Analog setpoint selection Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg]

8211

EVF8211-E

8211-V020

2.2

8212

EVF8212-E

8212-V020

EVF8211-E-V020 EVF8212-E-V020 EVF8213-E-V020 EVF8214-E-V020

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

55 75 90 100

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

2.2

á 0 %

8213

EVF8213-E

8213-V020

2.2

8214

EVF8214-E

8214-V020

2.2

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4) Only with variant “HVAC”

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.3

Types 8215 to 8218

150 % overload Type

Order No.

Type

8215

EVF8215-E

8215-V003

8216

EVF8216-E

8216-V003

8217

EVF8217-E

8217-V003

8218

EVF8218-E

8218-V003

Variant “HVAC”

Order No.

Type

EVF8215-C-V003 EVF8216-C-V003 EVF8217-C-V003 EVF8218-C-V003

8215-V020 8216-V020 8217-V020 8218-V020

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

V r

[V]

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

[A]

I mains

[A]

8.8

13.2

12.0

18.0

15.0

22.5

20.5

--

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 450 V $ V

DC

3 AC/460 V/50 Hz/60 Hz; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 725 V 400 V

$

460 V

650 V or

400 V 460 V 400 V 460 V 400 V 460 V

P r

[kW] 4.0

5.5

5.5

7.5

7.5

11.0

11.0

15.0

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz*

Order No.

V

DC

[V]

P r

[hp]

S r8

[kVA]

EVF8215-E-V020 EVF8216-E-V020 EVF8217-E-V020 EVF8218-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 510 V + 0 %; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0 %

450 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 715 V + 0 %

5.4

6.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

9.0

10.0

10.0

15.0

15.0

20.0

10.3

11.4

13.7

16.3

19.5

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

4 kHz*

P

DC

I r4

[kW]

[A]

1.0

9.4

1.0

9.4

0.0

13.0

0.0

13.0

3.9

16.5

3.9

16.5

0.0

23.5

0.0

23.5

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

I r8

I r12

[A]

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

9.4

7.9

7.0

9.4

8.0

9.4

7.4

6.6

8.9

7.6

13.0

13.0

16.5

16.5

23.5

23.5

10.9

9.7

13.0

11.1

10.3

9.1

12.3

10.5

13.9

12.3

16.5

14.1

13.0

11.6

15.6

13.3

19.7

17.6

23.5

20.0

18.5

16.5

22.1

18.8

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

I r8

I r12

[A]

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

7.5

6.1

14.1

14.1

11.9

10.6

14.1

12.0

11.3

9.1

7.0

5.6

14.1

14.1

11.1

9.8

13.3

11.3

10.6

8.5

10.4

8.4

19.5

19.5

16.4

14.6

19.5

16.6

15.6

12.7

9.7

7.8

19.5

19.5

15.4

13.6

18.3

15.6

14.6

11.7

13.2

10.7

24.8

24.8

20.8

18.6

24.8

21.1

19.8

16.1

12.4

9.9

24.8

24.8

19.6

17.4

23.4

19.9

18.8

14.9

18.8

15.3

35.3

35.3

29.6

26.5

35.3

30.0

28.2

22.9

17.6

14.1

35.3

35.3

27.9

24.7

55.1

28.2

26.4

21.1

3-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload Type

Order No.

Type

Variant “HVAC”

Order No.

Type

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

Power derating

Order No.

V

M

[V]

P loss

[W]

[%/K]

[%/m]

Resolution Absolute

Accuracy

Analog setpoint selection Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg] Weight

”Cold Plate” without heat sink

”Cold Plate” with heat sink

8215

EVF8215-E

8215-V003

EVF8215-C-V003 EVF8216-C-V003 EVF8217-C-V003 EVF8218-C-V003

8215-V020 8216-V020 8217-V020 8218-V020

EVF8215-E-V020 EVF8216-E-V020 EVF8217-E-V020 EVF8218-E-V020

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

150 200 280 400

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

5.3

2.8

20.8

8216

EVF8216-E

8216-V003

5.3

2.8

20.8

á 0 %

8217

EVF8217-E

8217-V003

5.3

2.8

20.8

8218

EVF8218-E

8218-V003

5.3

2.8

20.8

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4) Only with variant “HVAC”

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.4

Types 8221 to 8224

150 % overload

Variant ”Cold Plate”

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

8221

EVF8221-E

8221-V003

8222

EVF8222-E

8222-V003

EVF8221-C-V003 EVF8222-C-V003

8223

EVF8223-E

8224

EVF8224-E

Variant “HVAC” Type 8221-V020 8222-V020 8223-V020 8224-V020

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

Order No.

V r

[V]

V

DC

[V]

EVF8221-E-V020 EVF8222-E-V020 EVF8223-E-V020 EVF8224-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0 %

460 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 740 V + 0 %

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

I mains

[A]

[A]

29.0

43.5

42.0

--

55.0

--

80.0

--

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 740 V 400 V

$

480 V

620 V or

400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

15

20

18.5

25

22

30

30

40

30

40

37

49.5

45

60

55

74

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz* S r8

[kVA] 22.2

26.6

32.6

39.1

41.6

49.9

61.7

73.9

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

4 kHz*

P

DC

I r4

[kW]

[A]

10.2

32

11.8

32

4.0

47

4.6

47

0

59

0

56

5.1

89

5.9

84

8 kHz* 32 32 47 47 59 56 89 84

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz*

Noise optimised 8 kHz*

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

4)

4)

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

I r12

[A]

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I rmax4

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

V

M

[V]

P loss

[A]

[W]

27

24

32

29

25

21

48

48

40

36

48

43

38

31

25

22

30.5

27

24

19

48

48

38

33

46

41

36

29

40

35

47

43

37

30

70.5

70.5

59

53

70.5

64

56

0 - 3 x V mains

430

46

37

33

45

41

35

28

70.5

70.5

56

49

66.5

61

53

50

44

59

47

44

35

89

89

75

66

89

70

66

5)

5)

47

41

56

44

38

30

84

84

70

61

56

65

57

5)

5)

71

62

89

59

62

53

92

81

88

81

5)

134

134

134

5)

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

640

42 53

810

45 69

1100

67

58

84

55

58

49

87

75

75

63

5)

126

126

126

82 5)

3-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload Type

Order No.

Type Variant ”Cold Plate”

Variant “HVAC”

Order No.

Type

Power derating

Order No.

[%/K]

[%/m]

Resolution Absolute frequency

Accuracy

Analog setpoint selection Linearity

Weight

”Cold Plate” without heat sink

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg]

8221

EVF8221-E

8221-V003

15

11

8222

EVF8222-E

8222-V003

15

11

8223

EVF8223-E

8224

EVF8224-E

EVF8221-C-V003 EVF8222-C-V003

8221-V020 8222-V020 8223-V020 8224-V020

EVF8221-E-V020 EVF8222-E-V020 EVF8223-E-V020 EVF8224-E-V020

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

á 0 %

15

-

33.5

-

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4)

5)

Only with variant “HVAC”

Must only be operated with C144 = -1- (automatic chopper frequency derating at J max exceed the currents.

= + 5 • C). Ensure not to

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.5

Types 8225 to 8227

150 % overload Type

Order No.

8225

EVF8225-E

8226

EVF8226-E

8227

EVF8227-E

Variant “HVAC” Type 8225-V020 8226-V020 8227-V020

Mains voltage

Order No.

V r

[V]

EVF8225-E-V020 EVF8226-E-V020 EVF8227-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0 %

460 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 740 V + 0 % Alternative DC supply V

DC

[V]

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

I mains

[A]

[A]

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 740 V 400 V

100

--

$ 620 V or

480 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

55

74

75

100

400 V

75

100

135

--

480 V

90

120

400 V

90

120

165

--

480 V

110

148

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz*

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

S r8

[kVA]

P

DC

[kW]

76.2

0

91.4

0

103.9

28.1

124

32.4

124.7

40.8

149

47.1

4 kHz* 110 105 150 142 180 171

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz*

Noise optimised 8 kHz*

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

4)

4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

I r8

[A]

[A]

I

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A] rmax4

I rmax8

[A]

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I

I rmax4

[A] rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

V

M

[V]

P loss

[W]

110

88

77

110

76

66

60

114

85

78

5)

165

165

114

100

165

5)

1470

105

83

72

104

71

60

55

94

107

78

72

5)

157

157

108

156

5)

150

120

105

150

92

82

67

138

87

5)

225

225

156

136

225

107

5)

1960

142

112

98

141

86

75

60

5)

213

213

147

128

212

169

98

78

5)

171

126

108

159

100

90

72

270

221

164

140

117

94

5)

5)

238 5)

150 5)

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

2400

162

117

99

149

94

81

63

256

211

130

223 5)

141 5)

83

5)

5)

153

106

3-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload

Variant “HVAC”

Power derating

Weight

Resolution

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

[%/K]

[%/m]

Absolute

Accuracy

Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg]

8225

EVF8225-E

8225-V020

36.5

8226

EVF8226-E

8226-V020

EVF8225-E-V020 EVF8226-E-V020 EVF8227-E-V020

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

á 0 %

59

8227

EVF8227-E

8227-V020

59

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4)

5)

Only with variant “HVAC”

Must only be operated with C144 = -1- (automatic chopper frequency derating at J max exceed the currents.

= + 5 • C). Ensure not to

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.6

Types 8241 to 8243

150 % overload

Variant ”Cold Plate”

Typ

Order No.

Type

Order No.

8241

EVF8241-E

8241-V003

EVF8241-C-V003

8242

EVF8242-E

8242-V003

EVF8242-C-V003

8243

EVF8243-E

8243-V003

EVF8243-C-V003

Variant “HVAC” Type 8241-V020 8242-V020 8243-V020

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

Order No.

V r

[V]

V

DC

[V]

EVF8241-E-V020 EVF8242-E-V020 EVF8243-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0 %

460 V -0 % $ V

DC

$ 740 V + 0 %

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

I mains

[A]

[A]

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 740 V 400 V

1.5

2.1

$ 620 V or

480 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

0.37

0.5

0.37

0.5

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz* S r8

[kVA] 1.0

1.2

400 V

0.75

1.0

1.7

2.5

3.5

480 V

0.75

1.0

2.1

400 V

1.5

2.0

2.7

3.9

5.5

480 V

1.5

2.0

3.2

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12kHz*

P

DC

I r8

[kW]

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

1.9

1.5

1.5

1.35

2.3

1.5

1.5

1.35

0.7

2.5

2.5

2.2

0.9

2.5

2.5

2.2

0

3.9

3.9

3.5

0

3.9

3.9

3.5

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

1.2

1.5

1.3

1.2

1.5

1.3

2.0

2.5

2.2

2.0

2.4

2.1

3.1

3.9

2.9

3.1

3.7

2.8

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

V

M

[A]

[V]

P loss

[W]

1.3

1.1

2.2

2.2

2.0

1.8

2.3

2.0

1.9

1.6

1.3

1.1

2.25

2.25

2.0

1.8

2.2

1.8

1.9

2.1

1.8

3.7

3.7

3.3

3.0

3.8

3.2

3.2

2.1

1.8

3.75

3.75

3.3

3.0

3.6

3.0

3.2

3.4

2.9

5.8

5.8

5.2

4.7

5.8

5.0

5.1

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

50

1.6

2.7

65

2.7

4.3

100

3.4

2.9

5.85

5.85

5.2

4.7

5.5

4.7

5.1

4.3

3-14

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload

Variant ”Cold Plate”

Variant “HVAC”

Power derating

Resolution

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

[%/K]

[%/m]

Absolute

Accuracy

Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg]

8241

EVF8241-E

8241-V003

8242

EVF8242-E

8242-V003

8243

EVF8243-E

8243-V003

EVF8241-C-V003

8241-V020

EVF8242-C-V003

8242-V020

EVF8243-C-V003

8243-V020

EVF8241-E-V020 EVF8242-E-V020 EVF8243-E-V020

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

3.5

á 0 %

3.5

5.0

Weight

”Cold Plate” without heat sink

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4) Only with variant “HVAC”

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.4.7

Types 8244 to 8246

150 % overload

Variant ”Cold Plate”

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

8244

EVF8244-E

8244-V003

EVF8244-C-V003

8245

EVF8245-E

8245-V003

EVF8245-C-V003

8246

EVF8246-E

8246-V003

EVF8246-C-V003

Variant ”HVAC” Type 8244-V020 8245-V020 8246-V020

Mains voltage

Alternative DC supply

Order No.

V r

[V]

V

DC

[V]

EVF8244-E-V020 EVF8245-E-V020 EVF8246-E-V020

320 V -0 % $ V r

$ 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz ¡ 65 Hz á 0 %

460 V -0% $ V

DC

$ 740 V + 0 %

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke without mains filter/mains choke

I mains

I mains

[A]

[A]

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

$ 740 V 400 V

7.0

-

$ 620 V or

480 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

3.0

4.0

3.0

4.0

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz* S r8

[kVA] 4.8

5.8

400 V

5.5

7.5

9.0

12.0

16.8

480 V

5.5

7.5

10.8

400 V

11.0

15.0

16.3

20.5

-

480 V

11.0

15.0

10.8

Output power + U

G

, -U

G

1)

4 kHz*

P

DC

I r4

[kW]

[A]

2.0

7.0

2.5

7.0

0

13.0

0

13.0

0

23.5

0

23.5

8 kHz* 7.0

7.0

13.0

13.0

23.5

23.5

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz*

Noise optimised 8 kHz*

4)

4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

6.3

5.6

7.0

6.0

6.1

5.2

6.3

5.6

6.6

5.6

6.1

5.2

11.7

10.4

13.0

11.1

11.3

9.7

11.7

10.4

12.3

10.4

11.3

9.7

20.0

16.5

23.5

20.0

19.4

15.2

19.1

15.7

22.1

18.8

18.4

14.6

4 kHz*

8 kHz*

12 kHz*

16 kHz*

Noise optimised 4 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 8 kHz* 4)

Noise optimised 12 kHz*

Noise optimised 16 kHz*

Motor voltage 3)

Power loss (operation with I

Power derating rx

)

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I rmax4

I rmax8

[A]

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

V

M

[V]

P loss

[W]

[%/K]

[%/m]

10.5

10.5

9.5

8.4

10.5

7.8

9.1

7.8

10.5

10.5

9.5

8.4

8.4

7.8

9.1

7.8

19.5

19.5

17.5

15.6

19.5

14.5

16.5

14.5

19.5

19.5

17.5

15.6

15.6

14.5

16.5

14.5

35.0

35.0

30.0

24.6

35.5

22.9

29.0

22.9

0 - 3 x V mains

/ 0 Hz ¡ 50 Hz, if required up to 480 Hz

150 210 360

40 • C < T

V

< 50 • C: 2.5 %/K

1000 m a.m.s.l.

h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m

33.5

33.5

28.7

23.6

28.2

21.8

27.6

21.8

3-16

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

150 % overload

Variant ”Cold Plate”

Variant ”HVAC”

Resolution

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

Type

Order No.

Absolute

Accuracy

Linearity

Temperature sensitivity

Offset m [kg]

8244

EVF8244-E

8244-V003

8245

EVF8245-E

8245-V003

8246

EVF8246-E

8246-V003

EVF8244-C-V003

8244-V020

EVF8245-C-V003

8245-V020

EVF8246-C-V003

8246-V020

EVF8244-E-V020 EVF8245-E-V020 EVF8246-E-V020

0.02 Hz

á 0.05 Hz

á 0.5 % (max. selected signal level: 5 V or 10 V)

0 ¡ 40 • C: + 0.4 %

5.0

á 0 %

7.5

7.5

Weight

”Cold Plate” without heat sink

Printed in bold

1)

Data for the operation with factory setting and a chopper frequency of 8 kHz.

This power can be additionally obtained when operating a matching motor

2)

3)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

With mains choke/mains filter: max. output voltage = approx. 96 % of the mains voltage

4) Only with variant “HVAC”

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

8200SHB0199

3-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.5

Rated data

(Operation with 120 % overload)

3.5.1

Operating conditions

-

Applications:

- Pumps with square characteristic

- Fans

-

Operation only

- with mains filter or mains choke,

- with mains voltage 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz,

- 821X with chopper frequencies

{

8 kHz,

- 822X/824X with chopper frequencies = 4 kHz (chopper frequencies

{

16 kHz possible, load-dependent derating).

-

Automatic chopper-frequency reduction to 4 kHz.

Adapt mains-side accessories to the increased mains current:

- Fuses and cable cross-sections, see chapter 3.6.3.

- For data of other components, see ”Accessories”.

3.5.2

Types 821X

120 % overload

Rated mains current with mains filter/mains choke

Type

I r

[A]

8211 8212 8213

3.0

3.9

7.0

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 450 V $ V

DC

$ 650 V

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

1.1

1.5

1.5

2.0

3.0

4.0

Output power U, V, W S r

[kVA] 2.1

2.7

5.2

Max.

4 kHz

8 kHz *1)

4 kHz

I r

[A]

I r

[A]

I

Nm

[A]

3.0

3.0

3.6

3.9

3.9

5.9

7.3

7.3

8.3

8214

7.0

3.0

4.0

5.2

7.3

7.3

11.0

8215

12.0

5.5

7.5

9.0

13.0

13.0

14.1

8216

12.0

5.5

7.5

9.0

13.0

13.0

19.5

8217

20.5

11.0

15.0

16.3

23.5

23.5

24.8

8218

20.5

11.0

15.0

16.3

23.5

23.5

35.3

for 60 s 2)

Power loss

8 kHz *1)

P

I

Nm loss

[A]

[W]

3.6

65

5.9

75

8.3

100

11.0

100

14.1

200

19.5

200

24.8

400

35.3

400

1) Only with variant “HVAC”

* No dyn. chopper frequency derating of the inverter

All other data, see chapter 3.4.2 and chapter 3.4.3.

3-18

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.5.3

Types 822X

120 % overload Type 8221 8222 8223

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke I mains

[A] 39.0

50.0

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

$

60.0

620 V

1)

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz *

4 kHz

8 kHz

4 kHz

8 kHz

*

*

12 kHz

16 kHz

*

*

*

*

Noise optimised 4 kHz

Noise optimised 8 kHz

12 kHz * for

60 s 2) 16 kHz *

Noise optimised 8 kHz

Power loss (operation with I r4

)

*3)

*3)

Noise optimised 12 kHz *

Noise optimised 16 kHz *

Noise optimised 4 kHz *3)

*3)

Noise optimised 12 kHz

Noise optimised 16 kHz

*

*

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

S r4

S r8

[kVA]

[kVA]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I rmax8

[A]

I rmax12

[A]

I rmax16

[A]

P loss

[W]

22

30

29.8

22.2

43

32

27

24

32

29

25

21

48

48

40

36

48

43

38

31

640

30

40

39.5

32.6

56

47

40

35

47

43

37

30

70.5

70.5

59

53

70.5

64

56

46

810

37.5

50

46.4

41.6

66

59

50

44

59

47

44

35

89

89

75

66

89

70

66

53

4)

4)

810

8224

97.0

55

74

74.8

61.7

100

89

62

54

89

59 4)

54

46

134

134

92

81

134

88 4)

81

69

1350

8225

119

75

100

91.5

76.2

135

110

88

77

110

76 4)

66

60

165

165

114

100

165

114 4)

85

78

1470

1) 8226

145

8227

185

1)

1)

2)

3)

4)

Max. permissible ambient operating temperature + 35 • C

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

Only with variant “HVAC”

Must only be operated with C144 = -1- (automatic chopper frequency derating at J max exceed the currents.

= + 5 • C). Ensure not to

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

For more data, see chapter 3.4.4 and chapter 3.4.5.

110

148

142

124.7

205

171

126

108

159 4)

100 4)

90

72

270

221

164

140

238 4)

150 4)

117

94

2400

120

105

150

92 4)

82

67

225

90

120

110

103.9

159

150

225

156

136

225

138 4)

107

87

2100

8200SHB0199

3-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.5.4

Types 824X

120 % overload Type 8241 8242

Mains current with mains filter/mains choke I mains

[A] 1.7

Data for mains operation with 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz ; 460 V $ V

DC

2.8

$ 620 V

Output power U, V, W at 4 kHz/8 kHz *

4 kHz

8 kHz

*

*

12 kHz

16 kHz

*

*

Noise optimised 4 kHz

Noise optimised 8 kHz

*2)

*2)

Noise optimised 12 kHz

Noise optimised 16 kHz

8 kHz *

12 kHz * for

60 s 1) 16 kHz *

*

*

Noise optimised 4 kHz *2)

Noise optimised 8 kHz *2)

Noise optimised 12 kHz *

Noise optimised 16 kHz

Power loss (operation with I rx

)

*

P r

[kW]

P r

[hp]

S r4

S r8

[kVA]

[kVA]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

I rmax4

[A]

I r8

I r12

[A]

[A]

I r16

[A]

I r4

[A]

I r8

[A]

I r12

[A]

I r16

[A]

P loss

[W]

0.55

0.75

1.3

1.0

1.8

1.5

1.35

1.2

1.5

1.3

1.3

1.1

2.25

2.2

2.0

1.8

2.3

2.0

1.9

1.6

50

1.1

1.5

2.1

1.7

3.1

2.5

2.2

2.0

2.5

2.2

2.1

1.8

3.6

3.7

3.3

3.0

3.8

3.2

3.2

2.7

65

8243

5.0

5.5

3.9

3.5

3.1

2.2

2.9

3.8

2.7

3.9

2.9

3.4

2.9

6.6

5.8

5.2

4.7

5.8

5.0

5.1

4.3

115

8244

8.8

4.0

5.4

6.5

4.8

9.2

7.0

6.3

5.6

7.0

6.0

6.1

5.2

11.0

10.5

9.5

8.4

10.5

7.8

9.1

7.8

165

8245

15.0

8246

20.5

1)

2)

The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and

2 minutes base load with 75 % I rx

.

Only with variant “HVAC”

* Chopper frequency of the inverter

For more data see chapter 3.4.6 and chapter 3.4.7.

7.5

10.0

11.1

9.0

16.0

13.0

11.7

10.4

13.0

11.1

11.3

9.7

19.5

19.5

17.5

15.6

19.5

14.5

16.5

14.5

260

11.0

15.0

16.3

16.3

23.5

23.5

20.0

16.5

23.5

20.0

19.4

15.2

35.3

35

30.0

24.6

35.5

22.9

29.0

22.9

360

3-20

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.6

Fuses and cable cross-sections

3.6.1

Operation of controllers in UL-approved systems

-

Use only UL-approved fuses and fuse holders:

- 500 V to 600 V in the mains input (AC, F1 ... F3),

- 700 V in the voltage DC bus (DC, F4/F5),

- Activation characteristic ”H” or ”K5”.

Only use UL-approved cables

Note!

-

UL-approved fuses and fuse holder are produced and sold by e.g.

Gemballa Electronics GmbH in Kaltenkirchen, Germany.

-

DC fuses as part of the Lenze accessories are UL approved.

3.6.1.1

Protection of the motor cables

-

For functional reasons, the motor cables need not to be protected by fuses if you only connect a motor per controller.

-

If you want to drive several motors in parallel connected to a controller, an individual cable protection is required when reducing the cable cross-section.

-

Refer to the data listed in ”Operation with mains filter/mains choke”

8200SHB0199

3-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.6.2

Single drives with 150 % overload

The table values are valid for the operation of 82XX controllers as single drives with a matching motor and 150 % overload.

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

Operation without mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

VDE

8201 M 10A

8202 M 15A

8203 M 20A

8204 -

-

-

-

UL

-

VDE

C 10A

C 16A

C 20A

Mains input L1, N, PE / motor connection U, V, W, PE

mm 2

1.5

2.5

4

-

AWG

15

13

11

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

VDE

M 10A

M 15A

M 15A

M 20A

Operation with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

-

-

-

-

UL VDE

C 10A

C 16A

C 16A

C 20A mm

1.5

2.5

2

[1.5]

2.5

[1.5]

4

[2.5]

AWG

15

13

[15]

13

[15]

11

[13]

Values in square brackets are valid for motor connection

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE / motor connection U, V, W, PE

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

Operation without mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

VDE

8211 M 6A

8212 M 10A

8213 M 10A

8214 -

8215 M 16A

8216 M 25A

8217 M 32A

8218 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

UL

-

-

VDE

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 16A

B 25A

B 32A

-

mm 2

1

1.5

1.5

2.5

6

6

-

-

AWG

17

15

15

13

10

10

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

VDE

M 6A

M 6A

M 10A

M 10A

M 16A

M 20A

M 25A

M 32A

Operation with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

UL VDE

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 10A

B 13A

B 20A

B 25A

B 32A mm 2

1

1

1.5

1.5

2.5

4

6

6

11

10

10

15

15

13

AWG

17

17

8221 63A

8222 --

8223 --

8224 --

8225 --

8226 --

8227 --

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

Operation without mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

VDE UL VDE mm 2 AWG

8241 M 6A

8242 M 6A

8243 M 10A

8244 --

8245 M 25A

8246 --

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

5A

5A

B 6A

B 6A

10A B 10A

---

25A B 25A

---

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE / motor connection U, V, W, PE

16

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

6

--

1

1

1.5

5

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

10

--

17

17

15

Fuse

F1, F2, F3

VDE

M 35A

M 50A

M 80A

M 100A

M 125A

M 160A

M 200A

M 6A

M 6A

M 10A

M 10A

M 20A

M 32A

Operation with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

UL

35A

50A

5A

5A

10A

10A

20A

25A

VDE

--

--

80A --

100A --

125A --

175A --

200A --

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 10A

B 20A

B 32A mm

10

16

25

50

70

95

120

1

1

1.5

1.5

4

6

2 AWG

7

5

3

0

2 / 0

3 / 0

4 / 0

15

11

10

17

17

15

1) Observe national and regional regulations (e.g. VDE/EVU)!

3-22

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

8226

8227

8241

8242

8243

8221

8222

8223

8224

8225

8244

8245

8246

8211

8212

8213

8214

8215

8216

8217

8218

3.6.3

Single drives with 120 % overload

The table values are valid for operation of 82XX controllers with matching motor and 120 % overload in pump and fan drives.

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE / motor connection U, V, W, PE

Fuse F1, F2, F3

VDE

M 6A

M 6A

M 10A

M 10A

M 20A

M 20A

M 32A

M 32A -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

UL

Operation with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

VDE

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

Cable cross-section 1) mm 2

1

AWG

17

B 10A

B 20A

B 20A

B 32A

B 32A

6

6

1

1.5

1.5

4

4

17

15

15

11

11

10

10

Fuse F1, F2, F3

VDE

M 50A

M 63A

M 80A

M 125A

M 160A

M 160A

M 200A

M 6A

M 6A

M 10A

M 10A

M 20A

M 32A

175A

200A

5A

5A

10A

UL

50A

63A

80A

125A

175A

10A

20A

25A

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE / motor connection U, V, W, PE

Operation only with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1)

VDE

--

--

--

--

-mm 2

16

25

25

70

95

AWG

5

3

3

2 / 0

3 / 0

--

--

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 10A

B 20A

B 32A

95

120

1

1

1.5

1.5

4

6

15

11

10

3 / 0

4 / 0

17

17

15

1) Observe national and regional regulations (e.g. VDE/EVU)!

8200SHB0199

3-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.7

Analog plug-in module 8279IB

Order No.

EMZ8279IB

Note!

Only controllers of the 8210, 8220 and 8240 HVAC (V020) series can be equipped with an analog plug-in module 8278IB, because they provide the required software.

3.7.1

Features

The analog plug-in module 8279IB provides a second analog input. It converts an analog input signal (0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA) into a digital signal (pulse frequency

0 ... 10 kHz) with the following levels:

-

LOW level = 0 V ... 3 V

-

HIGH level = 12 V ... 30 V

For operation with 4 ... 20 mA, the following codes must be parameterised:

-

C426 = 125 %

-

C427 = -12.5 %

Further notes can be obtained from the code table.

Controllers of the 8210, 8220 and 8240 series equipped with an analog plug-in module, can be used for the following process controller applications:

-

Pressure regulation

Temperature or volume control

Setpoint summation

-

Speed or dancer-position control

To operate the analog plug-in module, the terminal configuration C007 has to be set to -28-...-45- or -48- ... -51-.

The inverters with plug-in module are subject to the technical data and application conditions of the controllers.

3-24

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Technical Data

3.8

3.8.1

Dimensions

The controller dimensions depend on the mechanical installation (see chapter 4.1).

Analog plug-in module

Note!

Only controller of the series 8210, 8220 and 8240 HVAC (V020) can be equipped with the analog plug-in module.

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

4.00 cm

4.80 cm

0 - 10 V

0 - 20 mA

-

-

Jumper

8279frnt_gb

FIG 3-2 Dimensions of analog plug-in module

The changeover of the analog input between 0 V ... 10 V (factory setting) or

0 mA ... 20 mA (internal 500

W load) is carried out via a jumper on the PCB.

The jumper can be accessed when removing the cover from the internal PCB.

8200SHB0199

3-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4 Installation

4.1

Mechanical installation

4.1.1

Important notes

Use the controllers only as built-in devices!

If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, fluff, grease, aggressive gases):

- Take suitable preventive measures, e.g. separate air duct, installation of filters, regular cleaning, etc.

Ensure free space!

- You can install several controllers next to each other without free space in a control cabinet.

- Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air!

- Allow a free space of 100 mm at the top and at the bottom.

-

Do not exceed the ambient temperature permitted during operation

(see chapter 3.3).

-

With continuous oscillations or vibrations:

- Check the use of shock absorbers.

8200SHB0199 4-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Possible mounting positions for types 8201 to 8214

-

In vertical position at the back of the control cabinet, terminals point to the front:

- With attached fixing rails.

- With special fixing unit on one or two DIN rails.

-

Turned by 90

•

(flast assembly on the backside of the control cabinet):

- Insert the attached fixing rail into the guides at the heat sink.

-

Horizontally with an additional fan.

On a pivoting frame for assembly depths < 198 mm:

- Therefore easy handling and installation of the front interfaces possible.

Possible mounting positions for types 8215 to 8218

-

In vertical position at the back of the control cabinet, terminals point to the front:

- With attached fixing rails.

- Thermally separated with external heat sink (”push-through technique”).

- Variant V003 thermally separated with external cooler in ”Cold plate” technique (e.g. with convection cooler).

Possible mounting positions types 822X/824X

-

In vertical position at the back of the control cabinet, terminals point to the front:

- With attached fixing brackets.

- Thermally separated with external heat sink (”push-through technique”).

- Variant V003 thermally separated with external cooler in ”Cold plate” technique (e.g. with convection cooler).

4-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.2

Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets

4.1.2.1

Types 8201 to 8204 g

1) 3)

Lenze

Postfach101352 ,31763 HAMELN

2) d b c k a e

FIG 4-1 Dimensions 8201 - 8204: Standard assembly

[mm]

8201

8202

8202-V002

8203 / 8204

1)

2)

3)

Insert the fixing rail here for side assembly

Observe the free space required for the connection cables

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

64

64

64

83 b

210

210

210

283 c

29

29

29

38 d

190

190

190

263 e 3)

158

198

158

211 g

6.5

6.5

6.5

6.5

k

30

30

30

30

4.1.2.2

Type 8202-V002 (reduced assembly depth)

This variant is equipped with a heat sink with a smaller surface. Observe the following points to comply with the technical data:

-

Assembly on an unpainted, metallic assembly board.

-

Area > 0.15 m

2

.

-

Sheet thickness at least 2 mm.

8200SHB0199

4-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.2.3

Types 8211 to 8214 g

Lenze

Postfach101352 ,31763 HAMELN d b

1) 3)

2) c k a e

FIG 4-2 Dimensions 8211 - 8214: Standard assembly

[mm]

1)

2)

3)

Insert the fixing rail here for side assembly

Observe the free space required for the connection cables

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

8211 / 8212 / 8213 / 8214 a

83 b

283 c

38 d

263 e 3)

211 g

6.5

k

30

4-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.2.4

Types 8215 to 8218 g

Lenze

Postfach 101352,31763HAMELN

1) b d k a e

FIG 4-3 Dimensions 8215 - 8218: Standard assembly

[mm]

1)

2)

3)

Insert the fixing rail here for side assembly

Observe the free space required for the connection cables

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

8215 / 8216 / 8217 / 8218 a

125 b

283 d

263 e 3)

218 g

6.5

k

30

3)

8200SHB0199

4-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.2.5

Types 8221 to 8227

Assembly preparation (see FIG 4-4)

To assemble and install the controller it is necessary to remove the unit cover. The accessory kit inside the controller contains the parts required for assembly and installation.

1.Loosen screws (x).

2.Swing cover to the top and detach.

3.Screw fixing brackets onto the housing.

3)

(x)

FIG 4-4 Dimensions 8221 - 8227: Standard assembly

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

[mm]

8221 / 8222 / 8223

8224

8225

8226 / 8227 a

250

340

340

450 b

402

580

672

748.5

b1

350

510

591

680 c

22

28.5

28.5

30.5

c1

206

283

283

389 d

370

532

624

702 d1

24

38

38

38 e 3) e1 g

250 230 6.5

285 265 11

285 265 11

285 265 11 k

24

24

28

28 m

11

18

18

18

4-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

4.1.2.6

Types 8241 to 8246

Installation

FIG 4-5 Dimensions 8241 - 8246: Standard assembly

[mm]

8241 / 8242

8243 / 8244

8245 / 8246

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

Fig.

A

B

C a

78

97

135 b

384

384

384 b1

350

350

350 c

39

48.5

21.5

c1

-

-

92 d

365

365

365 d1

-

-

e 3) e1

230 250

230 250

230 250 g

6.5

6.5

6.5

k

30

30

30 -

m

-

8200SHB0199

4-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.3

DIN-rail assembly

4.1.3.1

Types 8201 to 8204

1)

Lenze

Postfach 101352,31763 HAMELN c3 b c2

1)

3)

2) c1 a e

FIG 4-6 Dimensions 8201 - 8204: DIN rail assembly

[mm]

8201

8202

8203 / 8204

2)

3)

1) 8201/8202: Assembly on a DIN rail (middle) or two DIN rails (top and bottom) possible)

8203 - 8204: Assembly on two DIN rails required

Observe the free space required for the connection cables

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

64

64

83 b

188

188

258 c1

16

16

16 c2

98

-

98 c3

149

149

149 e 3)

173

213

237

4-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.3.2

Types 8211 to 8214

1)

Lenze

Postfach 101352,31763 HAMELN c3

3)

2) b c2

1) c1 a e

FIG 4-7 Dimensions 8211 - 8214: DIN-rail assembly

1)

2)

3)

Assembly on two DIN rails required

Observe the free space required for the connection cables

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

[mm]

8211 / 8212 / 8213 / 8214 a

83 b

258 c1

16 c2 c3

149 e 3)

226

8200SHB0199

4-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.4

Assembly with thermally separated power stage

(”push-through technique”)

The heat sink of the controllers

8215 to 8218

-

8221 to 8227

-

8241 to 8246 can also be externally mounted to reduce the heat generated in the control cabinet.

You need an assembly frame with seal (see Accessories).

-

Distribution of the power loss of the controller:

- Enter approx. 65 % via the separated heat sink (heat sink + blower)

- Enter approx. 35 % inside the controller

-

The enclosure of the separated heat sink (heat sink + blower) is IP41.

-

The rated data of the controller is still valid.

Assembly preparation

1. Lay the halves of the assembly frame into the slot provided on the controller.

2. Push the frame halves together until the ends catch.

3. Slip the seal over the heat sink and lay it into the provided slot.

4-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.4.1

Types 8215 to 8218 l k g

Lenze

Postfach 101352 , 31763 H AM ELN

Z

3) b d3 n d2 d1 m c1 h f e c2 a

FIG 4-8 Dimensions 8215 - 8218: Assembly with thermally separated power stage

[mm]

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables

8215 / 8216 / 8217 / 8218 a

162 b

283 c1

31 c2

132 d1

10 d2 d3 e 3) f

90.5

192.5

218 88 g

6.5

h

8.5

Assembly cut-out [mm]

Line Z

Height

250 – 5

Width

132 – 5 k

16 – 2 l m n

147 – 2 19 – 2 266 – 2

8200SHB0199

4-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.4.2

Types 8221 to 8227 k l g

L

Z b d4 d3 n d2 d1 h h c1 m e c2 f c3 a

FIG 4-9 Dimensions 8221 - 8227: Assembly with thermally separated power stage

3)

[mm]

8221 / 8222 / 8223

8224 / 8225

8226 / 8227

With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a b c1 c2 c3 d1 d2 d3 d4 e 3) f g h

280 379 28 140 252 41 141 238 338 250 90 6 9

Assembly cut-out Z [mm]

8221 / 8222 / 8223

8224 / 8225

8226 / 8227

Height

338 – 1

Width

238 – 1 k l m n

20 – 2 259 – 2 20 – 2 359 – 2

4-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.4.3

Types 8241 to 8246

Lenze d1 d b1 b d1 c a

1 g f e

FIG 4-10 Dimensions 8241 - 8246: Assembly with thermally separated power stage

[mm]

8241 / 8242

8243 / 8244

8245 / 8246

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

112.5

131.5

135 b

385.5

385.5

385.5

b1

350

350

350 c

60

79

117 c1

95.5

114.5

137.5

d

365.5

365.5

365.5

d1

105.5

105.5

105.5

e 3)

250

250

250 f

92

92

92 g

6.5

6.5

6.5

Assembly cut-out [mm]

8241 / 8242

8243 / 8244

8245 / 8246

Height

350 – 3

350 – 3

350 – 3

Width

82 – 3

101 – 3

139 – 3

8200SHB0199

4-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5

Assembly of the variant 82XX-V003 ”cold plate”

4.1.5.1

General

Fields of application

-

Application of coolers without separately driven fan:

- If e.g. the cooling air is so contaminated that it is not possible to use separately driven fans. The performance as well as the service life of the fan would be reduced.

-

High enclosure with thermal separation:

- If thermal separation is required because of the heat generation in the control cabinet and if the enclosure class of the cooling unit must be higher than IP41.

Application of controllers directly in the machine with reduced assembly depth:

- Machine components adopt the cooling function.

-

The drive concept provides common cooling units (water cooler, forced-air cooler, etc.) for all controllers.

-

Because of technical reasons, the convection cooling is not suitable for continuous powers > 22 kW. Here, forced cooling (e.g. water cooling) is required.

4-14

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.2

Demands on the cooler

Coolers, which can be operated with different coolants (air, water, oil, etc.), can dissipate the power loss of the controller.

In addition to the features required by the user, the following features are important for safe operation:

-

Good thermal connection with the cooler

- The contact surface between cooler and controller must be at least as large as the cold plate of the controller.

- Smooth contact surface: approx. 0.05 mm

- Connect cooler and cold plate by means of the provided screws.

- For further information see chapter 4.1.5.4 ff.

-

Observe the thermal resistance R thmin heat sink according to the table. The values are valid for

(transition cooler - coolant)

- the operation of controllers under rated conditions (see chapter 3.4),

- a max. temperature of the cold plate of 75

E

C, measuring point: see

FIG 4-11, FIG 4-13, FIG 4-14.

8215-V003

8216-V003

8217-V003

8218-V003

8221-V003

8222-V003

8241-V003

8242-V003

8243-V003

8244-V003

8245-V003

8246-V003

9351-V003

9352-V003

Cooling path

Power to be dissipated P loss crtl

[W]

135

180

250

360

410

610

24

42

61

105

180

360

100

63

R thmin heat sink

[K/W]

0.25

0.19

0.14

0.10

0.085

0.057

1.45

0.85

0.57

0.33

0.19

0.10

0.3

0.3

8200SHB0199 4-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.3

Thermal performance of the system

The thermal conditions of a system are influenced by several factors. Take the following into account for the selection of a control cabinet/system:

Ambient temperature of the controller

The rated data and the corresponding derating factors for higher temperatures are still valid for the ambient temperature of the controller.

Heat generation inside control cabinets

In addition to the unit losses, which are to be dissipated via the external heat sink, further losses must be taken into account:

-

Losses inside the controller

- These losses are generated by the electronics supply, fans, DC-bus capacitors, etc.

-

Losses of the mains and motor components:

- You find detailed information about the losses of these components in the corresponding technical data (Part 1) of the catalogs.

Heat radiation from the external cooler into the unit:

- This portion of the thermal energy depends, among others, on the type of cooling unit and assembly.

- 821X-V003:

Lenze convection coolers dissipate approx. 65 % of the total power loss of the controller via the cooler, approx. 35 % must be dissipated via the control-cabinet cooling.

- 822X-V003/824X-V003:

No details at present.

Thermal distribution to common cooling units/in the control cabinet

If several components (controller, brake units, etc.) are mounted onto a common cooler, it must be ensured that the cold plate temperature at the controller does not exceed 75

E

C.

Measures:

821X-V003 with Lenze convection coolers

- Min. free space required for the convection coolers:

200 mm left and right / 500 mm top and bottom.

- Do not install one controller on top of the other.

- If necessary, use integral fans to avoid heat concentration inside the control cabinet.

-

82XX-V003 with other coolers:

- No details at present, empirical testing required.

4-16

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.4

Assembly preparations

-

Apply the heat-conducting paste before you bolt the cooler onto the cold plate of the controller to reduce the heat-transfer resistance to a minimum.

-

The heat-conducting paste, which you will find in the accessory kit, will be enough for an area of approx. 1000 cm

2

.

Application of heat-conducting paste

1. Clean the contact surfaces of the cooler and cold plate with ethanol.

2. Apply the heat-conducting paste thinly with a scraper or a brush.

8200SHB0199

4-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.5

Assembly of 821X-C-V003

Note!

With 821X-C-V003, the cooler is screwed to the back of the controller cold plate.

Provide enough free space for the dismantling of the controller.

Control-cabinet assembly of Lenze convection coolers

The fixing screws are included in the delivery package of the convection cooler.

1. Use the 8 fixing screws M5 x 20 to screw the convection cooler onto the cold plate.

- For other screws observe the insertion depth t into the cold plate:

8 mm

$ t

$

10 mm

- Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm.

2. Push the gasket over the front onto the convection cooler.

3. Push the controller from behind through the cut-out at the back of the control cabinet.

4. Screw the fixing screws 8 x M6 x 12 from inside the control cabinet through the back and the gasket in the tapped holes of the heat sink.

- Tighten screws crosswise.

- Tightening torque: 5.4 Nm.

4-18

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Lenze

Postfach 101352 ,31763 HAMELN g

M6 x 12 max. 75 °C

3) b d1 d2 d2 c2 c1 a f e

[mm]

8215-V003

8216-V003

8217-V003

8218-V003

FIG 4-11 Dimensions 821X-V003: Control-cabinet assembly of Lenze convection coolers

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

300

300

300

300 b

400

500

600

750 c1

145

145

145

145 c2

100

100

100

100 d1

263

263

263

263 d2

80.5

80.5

80.5

80.5

e 3)

138

138

138

138 f

83

83

83

83 g

6.5

6.5

6.5

6.5

Assembly cut-out [mm] Height

250 – 5

Width

132 – 5

8200SHB0199

4-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Wall mounting of Lenze convection coolers

1. Use the 8 fixing screws M5 x 20 to screw the convection cooler onto the cold plate.

- The fixing screws are included in the delivery package of the convection cooler.

- For other screws observe the insertion depth t in the cold plate:

8 mm

$ t

$

10 mm

- Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm.

2. Fix the unit at the wall by screwing the 4 screws (max. diameter 8 mm) through the bores provided.

g

3)

Lenze

Postfach 101352 ,31763 HAMELN max. 75 °C b d c a f e

[mm]

8215-V003

8216-V003

8217-V003

8218-V003

FIG 4-12 Dimensions 821X-V003: Wall mounting of Lenze convection coolers

3) With of attachable fieldbus or I/O modules:

Observe the assembly depth and the space required for connection cables.

a

300

300

300

300 b

400

500

600

750 c

230

230

230

230 d

320

320

320

320 e 3)

138

138

138

138 f

83

83

83

83

9

9

9 g

9

4-20

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.6

Assembly of 822X-C-V003

-

Fix the controller to the heat sink using the fixing screws M5 x 25.

-

Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm.

L 3) max. 75 °C g c c1 a a1 e

[mm]

8221-V003

8222-V003

FIG 4-13 Dimensions 822X-C-V003: Control-cabinet assembly

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

234 a1

250 b

381 b1

350 c

110 c1

220 d

367 e 3)

171 g

6.5

8200SHB0199

4-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.5.7

Assembly of 824X-C-V003

-

Fix the controller to the heat sink using the fixing brackets and the fixing screws M5x20.

-

Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm.

Lenze Lenze Lenze

3) b1 d b b1 d b b1 d b max. 75 °C c a g c a g c2 c a g e

[mm]

8241-V003

8242-V003

8243-V003

8244-V003

8245-V003

8246-V003

FIG 4-14 Dimensions 824X-C-V003: Control-cabinet assembly

3) With attachable fieldbus or I/O module:

Observe assembly depth and assembly space required for connection cables a

78 b

381 b1

350 c

48 c2

d

367

97

135

381

381

350

350

67

105

-

38

367

367 e 3)

168

168

168 g

6.5

6.5

6.5

4-22

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.6

Assembly with mains filter

Note!

More information about dimensions, installation and selection of the appropriate mains filter can be obtained from the catalog Global Drive 8200 Frequency

Inverters.

Standard assembly 1.Screw the fixing brackets to the housing of the controller and the mains filter.

2.Connect the ready-to-use output cables (unit/load) of the filter to the mains input of the controller (L1, L2, L3, PE).

3.Use all fixing brackets to mount the unit to the assembly wall.

Assembly with thermally separated power stage

1.For assembly preparations, see chapter 4.1.4.

2.Dismantle the housing of the mains filter.

3.Mount the controller into the assembly cut-out.

4.Connect the ready-to-use output cables of the filter (unit/load) to the mains input of the controller (L1, L2, L3, PE).

Assembly of the variant “Cold plate” 1.For assembly preparations, see chapter 4.1.5.

2.Dismantle the housing of the mains filter.

3.Mount the controller into the assembly cut-out.

4.Connect the ready-to-use output cables of the filter (unit/load) to the mains input of the controller (L1, L2, L3, PE).

Assembly, if the assembly space is not deep enough

1.Mount the mains filter next to the controller.

2.Refer to the dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage.

8200SHB0199

4-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.1.7

Assembly of the analog plug-in module 8279IB

Note!

Only controllers of the series 8210, 8220 and 8240 HVAC (V020)can be equipped with the analog plug-in module 8279IB.

F r o n t v i e w S i d e v i e w

8 2 7 9

4-24

8200SHB0199

K 3 5 . 0 1 4 1 G B

FIG 4-15 Analog plug-in module directly mounted onto the controller

Assembly

-

The analog plug-in module is plugged onto the right terminal strip

(terminals 20 ... 39).

-

The assembly depth of the controller is thus increased by 40 mm.

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

What to do

If mounted, remove the socket connector mounted to terminals 20 ... 39.

Connect the plug-in module to the terminals 20 ... 39.

Plug the socket connector in the terminals strip of the analog plug-in module (the plug-in module serves as intermediate adapter).

Connect the analog input to the terminals E1 and 39 of the socket connector.

Note!

Because of the mechanical instability, the installation of an analog plug-in module

and a PTC input module should be avoided.

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2

4.2.1

Electrical installation

For information on the installation according to EMC, see chapter 4.3.

Operator’s safety

Danger!

All power terminals remain live up to 3 minutes after mains disconnection.

Labelling of the r.c.c.b.

Meaning

AC-sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type AC)

Pulse-current sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type A)

All-current sensitive residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB, type B)

Definition

Protection of persons and animals

In the following text “RCCB” is used for “residual-current circuit breaker”.

DIN VDE 0100 with residual-current operated protective devices (RCCB):

The controllers are internally equipped with a mains rectifier. In the event of a short circuit to frame a smooth DC fault current can block the activation of the AC sensitive or pulse-current sensitive r.c.c.b. and thus eliminate the protective function for all units connected to this r.c.c.b.

We therefore recommend:

- ”Pulse-current sensitive r.c.c.b.” in systems with 820X controllers (L1/N).

- ”All-current sensitive r.c.c.b.” in systems with 821X/822X/824X controllers (L1/L2/L3).

Rated fault current

Installation

-

-

Please observe the rated fault current for the selection of the r.c.c.b.

The r.c.c.b. may be activated unintentionally by

capacitive leakage currents between the cable screens (especially with long screened motor cables), simultaneous connection of several controllers to the mains, using RFI filters.

The r.c.c.b. must only be installed between the supplying mains and the controller.

Note about the use of all-current sensitive r.c.c.b.

All-current sensitive r.c.c.b. are described for the first time in the European standard EN 50178

(version October 1997). The EN 50178 has been harmonised and has been effective since

October 1997. It replaces the national standard VDE 0160. The r.c.c.b. are also described in the

IEC 755.

R.c.c.b. with a rated fault current of

- 30 mA are only suitable for systems with 820X controllers,

- 300 mA are only suitable for systems with 821X/822X/824X controllers.

Electrical isolation / protection against contact

The control inputs and outputs of all controllers are mains isolated. Please observe the terminal description of the different controllers.

Replacement of defective fuses

Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied.

For single drives, the controller carries a hazardous voltage up to three minutes after mains disconnection.

In DC-bus operation, all controllers must be inhibited and separated from the mains.

Separate controller from the mains

Make a safety disconnection between the controller and mains only via a contactor at the input side.

Ensure that all controllers connected to the DC-bus are inhibited.

8200SHB0199

4-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.2

Protection of the controllers

Stop!

The controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components:

Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of electrostatic charge.

Discharging is possible by touching the PE fixing screw or another grounded metal part in the control cabinet.

4.2.3

-

The controller is protected by external fuses.

-

Unused control inputs and outputs should be covered with plugs.

-

Frequent mains switching can overload the internal switch-on current limitation. For cyclic mains switching, the controller can be switched on every three minutes as a maximum.

-

The controllers 8204, 8214, 8218, 8222 - 8227, 8224, 8246 must only be operated together with appropriate mains filter/mains choke.

-

In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage only after the visible humidity has evaporated.

Motor protection

-

Total motor protection according to VDE:

- By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring

- Required for group drives

(motors connected in parallel to a controller)

- We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats with PTC characteristic for monitoring the motor temperature.

(As standard, Lenze three-phase AC motors are equipped with PTCs.)

- The PTC or thermostat can be directly connected to the units 822X/824X.

With the units 820X/821X, they are connected by means of the PTC module 8274 or the I/O module 8275 (see Accessories).

When using motors with insulation which is not suitable for inverter operation:

- Please contact your motor supplier.

Lenze-three-phase AC motors are designed for inverter operation.

- In general, operation with the assigned motor filters is possible.

-

With the corresponding parameter setting, the controllers reach field frequencies up to 240 Hz/480 Hz:

- When operating inappropriate motors, dangerous overspeeds may occur and result in the destruction of the drive.

4-26

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.4

Mains types/mains conditions

Please observe the restrictions of each mains type!

Mains

With grounded neutral

(TT/TN mains)

Operation of the controllers

No restrictions

Notes

Observe controller ratings.

With isolated neutral

(IT mains)

With grounded phase

DC-supply via + U

G

/-U

G

Operation of several 820X controllers connected to a mains 3AC / N / PE and symmetrical distribution to the three outer conductors excepted

Possible, if the controller is protected from an earth fault in the supplying mains

-

by corresponding equipment which detects the earth fault and immediately separates the controller from the mains.

Operation is only possible with one variant.

The DC voltage must be symmetrical to

PE.

Observe the load of the common N conductor.

-

- For r.m.s. current see chapter 3.4

Possibly enlarge the cross-section of the

N conductor.

Safe operation in the event of an earth fault in the output of the controller cannot be guaranteed.

Contact Lenze.

The controller will be destroyed when grounding + U

G

-conductor or -U

G

-conductor.

4.2.5

4.2.6

Combination with compensation equipment

-

The controllers take up a very low fundamental reactive power from the supplying AC mains. Therefore compensation is not necessary.

-

If the controllers are operated at a mains with compensation, this equipment must be used with chokes.

- For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.

Specification of the cables used

-

The cables used must comply with the approvals required at the site

(e.g. UL).

-

The prescribed minimum cross-sections of PE conductors must be maintained in all cases. The cross-section of the PE conductor must be at least as large as the cross-section of the power connections.

-

The screening quality of a cable is determined by

- a good screen connection,

- a low screen resistance.

Only use screens with tin-plated or nickel-plated copper braids!

Screens of steel braid are not suitable.

- For the overlapping degree of the screen braid:

At least 70 % to 80 % with an overlapping angle of 90

•

.

8200SHB0199

4-27

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7

Power connections

4.2.7.1

Mains connection

Types 8221 to 8227

PE

+UG L1 L2 L3 -UG

Types 8241 to 8246 s

L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG

PE

Correct screen connection with screened cables:

Connect the screen with suitable clamp to the conducting control cabinet mounting plate.

To improve the screen connection: Connect screen additionally to the stud next to the power connections.

Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):

Screw sreen plate

➀ on fixing bracket

.

Fix screen using cable lugs. Do not use as a strain relief!

To improve the screen connection: Connect the screen additionally to the stud next to the power connections.

FIG 4-16 Proposal for mains connection 822X/824X

-

Connect the mains cables to the screw terminals L1, L2, L3.

-

Connect cables for brake unit (935X), supply module (934X) or further controllers in the DC-bus connection to the screw terminals +U

G

, -U

G top of the controller.

at the

-

Max. permissible cable cross-sections and tightening torques:

Terminals

Type

8201 - 8214

8215 - 8218

8221 - 8223

8224 - 8225

8226 - 8227

8241 - 8246

Max. permissible cable cross-sections

2.5 mm 2

4 mm 2 1)

25 mm 2 2)

95 mm 2 2)

120 mm 2 2)

4 mm 2 1)

L1, L2, L3, + U

G

, -U

G

PE connection

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

4 Nm (35 lbin)

7 Nm (62 lbin)

1.7 Nm (15 lbin)

1.7 Nm (15 lbin)

12 Nm (106.2 lbin)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin) 3.4 Nm (30 lbin)

1)

2)

With pin-end connector:

With wire crimp cap:

With ring cable lug:

6 mm 2

4 mm 2

The cross-section is only limited by the cable cut-out in the housing.

4-28

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Protection

Fuses and cable cross-sections

-

-

-

-

The specifications in chapter 3.6 are recommendations and refer to the application in control cabinets and machines, installation in the cable duct, max. ambient temperature + 40 • C, as single drive with matching motor.

Selection of the cable cross-section For selection take into account the voltage drop when being loaded

(to DIN 18015 part 1:

3 %).

Protection of cables and controller on the AC side (L1, L2, L3)

-

-

-

By standard commercial fuses.

Fuses in UL-conform plants must have UL approval.

The rated voltages of the fuses must be dimensioned according to the mains voltage at the site. The activation characteristic is defined by ”H” or ”K5”.

Protection of cables and controller on the DC side (+ U

G

, -U

G

)

-

-

By means of recommended DC fuses.

The fuses/fuse holders recommended by Lenze are all UL-approved.

For DC group drives or supply via DC source

Observe notes in Part F.

Connection of a brake unit

Further information

Further standards

If the unit is connected to the terminals + U

G

/ -U

G

, the fuses and cross-sections indicated in chapter 3.6 are not valid. These unit-specific data can be obtained from the technical documentation for the brake unit.

For protection of cables and controllers, see chapter ”Accessories”.

The compliance with other standards (e.g. VDE 0113, VDE 0289, etc.) remains in the responsibility of the user.

4.2.7.2

Motor connection

For EMC safety reasons we recommend the use of screened motor cables.

Note!

The screening of the motor cable is only required to comply with existing standards

(e.g. VDE 0160, EN 50178).

Screen connection

-

820X: On the front FAST-ON connector.

-

8211 - 8214: On the front FAST-ON connector.

-

8215 - 8218: On the front metal surface.

8200SHB0199

4-29

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Types 8221/8222/8223

T1

PE

T2

U V W

Correct screen connection with screened cables:

Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal contact. Do not use as a strain relief!

To improve the screen connection: Connect the screen additionally to the stud PE next to the controller.

Types 8224/8225

PE

T1

T2

U V W

-

-

Strain relief by using cable binders

.

Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Apply motor cable screen to the screening plate using clamp and screws M5x12

.

- Connect thermal contact screen to the stud PE next to the motor connection over a large surface.

M5 X 12

‚



Types 8226/8227

T1

PE

T2

U V W

M4 X 12

ƒ

M5 X 12

‚



Strain relief by using cable clamps and screws

M4x12

.

- An additional strain relief/fixing is possible with cable binders

.

Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Apply motor cable screen to the screening plate using clamp and screws M5x12

.

- Connect thermal contact screen to the stud PE next to the motor connection over a large surface.

FIG 4-17 Proposal for motor connection with 822X

4-30

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Types 824X

T1 T2

PE

Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):

Screw sreen plate

➀ on fixing bracket

.

Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal contact. Do not use as a strain relief!

To improve the screen connection: Connect the screen additionally to the stud PE next to the motor connections.

‚



FIG 4-18 Proposal for motor connection with 824X

-

Connect the motor cables to the screw terminals U, V, W.

- Observe correct pole connection.

- Max. permissible cable cross-sections and tightening torques

Type

8201 - 8214

8215 - 8218

8221 - 8223

8224 - 8225

8226 - 8227

8241 - 8246

Max. permissible cable cross-sections

2.5 mm

4 mm 2 1)

25 mm

95 mm

2

2 2)

2 2)

Terminals

U, V, W

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

4 Nm (35 lbin)

7 Nm (62 lbin)

PE connection

1.7 Nm

(15 lbin)

1.7 Nm

(15 lbin)

120 mm 2 2) 12 Nm (106.2 lbin)

4 mm 2 1)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

3.4 Nm

(30 lbin)

Screen/ strain relief

-

-

-

3.4 Nm (30 lbin)

M4: 1.7 Nm (15 lbin)

M5: 3.4 Nm (30 lbin)

-

T1, T2

-

-

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

1)

2)

With pin-end connector:

With wire crimp cap:

With ring cable lug:

6 mm 2

4 mm 2

The cross-section is only limited by the cable cut-out in the housing.

Note!

-

Switching on the motor side of the controller is permitted

- for safety switch-off (emergency switch-off),

- under load.

8200SHB0199

4-31

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

-

The motor cable should be as short as possible because of the positive effect on the drive characteristic.

- FIG 4-19 shows the relation between the motor cable length and the possibly required output filters.

- For group drives (several motors connected to one controller) it is necessary to calculate the resulting cable length I res

:

,

UHV

VXP RI DOO PRWRU FDEOH OHQJWKV ô

¯

1R RI PRWRU FDEOHV

- The components stated in FIG 4-19 are valid for chopper frequencies

$

8 kHz (C018 = -0-, -1-). When using controllers with chopper frequencies > 8 kHz, different measures may be required. Please contact

Lenze.

- When using unscreened motor cables, the data indicated in FIG 4-19 are valid for the double motor cable length.

- Please contact Lenze when the absolute or resulting motor cable lengths are > 200 m.

Permissible control mode C014 Type

8201

8202

8203

8204

Type

8211

8212

0 15 25 50

Motor cable length (resulting), screened in m

100

Permissible control mode C014

-2-,

-3-,

-4-

-2-, -3-

-2-, -3-, -4-2-, -3-

200

0 15 25 50

Motor cable length (resulting), screened in m

100

Type

8221/8222

8223/8224/8225

8226/8227

8241/8242/8243

8244/8245/8246 none none

Additionally required output filters in the motor cable motor filter/motor choke none motor filter/motor choke

0 50 100

Motor-cable length (resulting), screened in m

FIG 4-19 Output filters additionally required in the motor cable

(contact Lenze) sine filter

200

200

4-32

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

-

When switching on the motor side, the switching units must be rated for DC voltages.

- 820X: V

DC max

ˆ

400 V

- 821X, 822X, 824X: V

DC max

ˆ

800 V

- If you only switch when no voltage is applied, e.g. electrical latching via controller inhibit, you can also use standard AC switching units.

Note!

When switching with controller enabled, the fault indication ”OCx”

(short-circuit/earth fault during operation x) can be activated.

-

When using long motor cables and controllers with low output power, leakage currents via parasitic cable capacities can activate the fault indication ”OCx”.

- In such a case, motor filters or sine filters should be used.

- Further information on long motor cables for stand-alone and group drives can be obtained from the corresponding application reports.

8200SHB0199

4-33

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7.3

Connection of a brake unit

-

When connecting a brake unit (brake module with internal brake resistor or brake chopper with external brake resistor) observe the corresponding

Operating Instructions in all cases.

Stop!

-

Design the circuit so that, if the temperature monitoring of the brake unit is activated,

- the controllers are inhibited (X5/28 = LOW),

- the mains is disconnected.

4-34

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

4.2.7.4

Connection plan 820X

L1

N/L2

PE

F1 F2*

K10

ϑ

RB

K10

PE

K10 K10*

RB

Z1

PE

PE

Z4

L1 N PE

+UG

-UG

8201... 8204

PE RB1 RB2 +UG -UG

Z3

PE U V W

Z 2

PE

-X1

M

3~ PE

FIG 4-20 820X power connections

Z2

Z3

Z4

RB

J

RB

X1

F1, F2* Fuses, F2*only for supply with 2AC / PE / 190 - 260 V

K10, K10* Mains contactor, K10*only for supply with 2AC / PE / 190 - 260 V

Z1 Mains choke, see Accessories (not required when using mains filters)

8204 operation only with assigned mains choke/mains filter

Motor filter/sine filter, see Accessories

Brake chopper/brake module, see Accessories

RFI filter/mains filter (symmetrically designed filters for L1/N (L2)

Brake resistor, see Accessories

Temperature monitoring brake resistor

Terminal strip in control cabinet

Installation

8200SHB0199

4-35

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7.5

Connection plan 821X

L1

L2

L3

N

PE

PE

F1 F2 F3

K10

ϑ

RB

K10

PE

K10

RB

Z 1

PE

PE

Z4

L1 L2 L3 PE

+UG

-UG

8211 ... 8218

RB1 RB2 +UG -UG

Z3

PE U V W

PE

Z2

-X1

M

3~ PE

FIG 4-21 821X power connections

Z2

Z3

Z4

RB

J

RB

X1

F1, F2, F3 Fuses

K10 Mains contactor

Z1 Mains choke, see Accessories (not required when using mains filters)

Types 8214/8218 should only be operated with assigned mains choke/mains filter

Motor filter/sine filter, see Accessories

Brake chopper/brake module, see Accessories

RFI filter/mains filter

Brake resistor, see Accessories

Temperature monitoring brake resistor

Terminal strip in control cabinet

4-36

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.7.6

Connection plan 822X/824X

L1

L2

L3

N

PE

PE

F1 F2 F3

K10

ϑ

RB

K10

K10

RB

Z 1

PE

PE

Z4

L1 L2 L3 PE

PE

+UG

-UG

8221 ... 8227

8241 ... 8246

RB1 RB2 +UG -UG

Z3

PE U V W

PE

Z2

-X1

M

3~ PE

FIG 4-22 822X/824X power connections

Z2

Z3

Z4

RB

J

RB

X1

F1, F2, F3 Fuses

K10

Z1

Mains contactor

Mains choke, see Accessories (not required when using mains filters)

Operate types 8222-8227, 8244/8246 only with assigned mains choke/mains filter

Motor filter/sine filter, see Accessories

Brake chopper/brake module, see Accessories

RFI filter/mains filter

Brake resistor, see Accessories

Temperature monitoring brake resistor

Terminal strip in control cabinet

8200SHB0199

4-37

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.8

Control connections

4.2.8.1

Control cables

-

Connect the control cables to the screw terminals:

Max. permissible cable cross-section

2.5 mm 2

Tightening torques

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

We recommend the unilateral screening of all cables for analog signals to avoid signal distortion.

-

Connect the screens of the control cables

- 820X:

To the front FAST-ON connector

- 8211 - 8214:

To the front FAST-ON connector

- 8215 - 8218:

To the front metal surface (screw length max. 12 mm).

- 822X, 824X

With the screen sheet to the front metal surface

(screw length max. 12 mm).

-

If the control cables are interrupted (terminal strips, relays), the screens must be reconnected over the shortest possible distance.

-

Connect the fixing screw of the setpoint potentiometer to PE.

Motor-temperature monitoring

(Optionally for 820X/821X, as standard for 822X/824X)

- If possible, separate the cables from the motor cable.

4.2.8.2

Assignment of the control terminals

Protection against contact - 820X/821X

-

The control terminals have a basic isolation (single insulating distance).

-

If protection against contact is required,

- a double insulating distance must be provided,

- the components to be connected must have a second insulating distance.

Protection against contact - 822X/824X

-

The control terminals are separated (VDE 0160, EN50178), the protection against contact is ensured without additional measures.

4-38

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Protection against polarity reversal

-

The protection against polarity reversal prevents the wrong connection of the internal control inputs. It is however possible to overcome the protection against polarity reversal by applying great force.

Overview

820X/821X 822X/824X

62

7

8

9

K11

K12

K14

K21

K22

K24

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

62

7

8

9

K11

K12

K14

K21

K22

K24

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

FIG 4-23 Layout of the control terminals

8200SHB0199

4-39

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Analog output

Digital inputs

E3

E2

E1

39

Monitoring T1

Terminal Use

(Factory setting is printed in bold)

7 GND 1

8 Setpoint input, reference:

Terminal 7

(0 to 10 V)

6

4

2

5

3

1

5 - 6

5 - 6

3 - 4

1 - 2

Level

9

62

Jumper

Data

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

0 to 5 V

0 to 10 V

Resolution: 820X: 9 bit,

821X/822X/824X: 10 bit

Linearity fault: – 0.5 %

Temperature fault: 0.3 % (0 ... + 40 • C)

Voltage signal: > 100 k ˆ

Current signal: 250 ˆ

5.2 V / 6 mA

0 ... 6 V / 2 mA

0 ... 10 V / 2 mA 1)

Resolution: 820X: 8 bit

821X/822X/824X: 10 bit

20

28

E4

Supply for setpoint potentiometer

Analog output, reference: Terminal 7

(Field frequency)

Voltage supply for digital inputs

820X: 12 V / 20 mA

821X/822X/824X: 15 V / 20 mA

Controller enable

CW/

CCW rotation (CW/CCW)

DC-injection brake

HIGH

CW: LOW

CCW: HIGH

HIGH

HIGH:

LOW:

12 V ... 30 V

0 V ... 3 V

T2

GND 2 (reference for external voltages)

Motor-temperature monitoring

(PTC thermistor/thermal contact)

Motor-temperature monitoring

(PTC thermistor/thermal contact)

If not used: Set parameter C119 = -0-!

Relay

Relay

Terminal Use

(Factory setting is printed in bold)

K 11

K 22

K 24

Relay output normally-closed contact

(TRIP)

Relay mid-position contact

Relay output normally-open contact

(TRIP)

K 21

K 22

Relay output normally-closed contact

(Ready for operation)

Relay mid-position contact

K 24 Relay output normally-open contact

(Ready for operation)

1) With 821X/822X/824X HVAC (V020)

Relay position (switched)

Opened

Closed

Opened

Closed

Data

24 V AC / 3.0 A or

250 V AC / 3.0 A or

60 V DC / 0.5 A

250 V AC / 3.0 A or

60 V DC / 0.5 A

250 V AC / 3.0 A or

60 V DC / 0.5 A

4-40

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.8.3

Connection diagrams for 822X/824X only

82XX

GND 1

Vref

5,2V

PE 62 7 8 9 K11 K12K14

K1

GND 2

Vcc

3k 3k 3k 3k 3k

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

K2

K21K22 K24 T1 T2

PTC

Sx

R 1k

FIG 4-24 Control connections: Supply with internal control voltage for 822X/824X only

82XX

GND 1

Vref

5,2V

PE 62 7 8 9 K11 K12 K14

K1

GND 2

Vcc 3k 3k 3k 3k 3k

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

+

-

12...30V

K2

K21K22 K24 T1 T2

PTC

Sx

R 1k

FIG 4-25 Control connections: External voltage supply (+12 V ... +30 V)

GND1

GND2

Reference for internal voltages

Reference for external voltages

GND1 and GND2 have a potential isolation inside the unit.

The connections for the motor temperature monitoring (T1, T2) are next to the connection terminals U, V, W.

8200SHB0199

4-41

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.2.8.4

Connection diagrams: Analog plug-in module

Note!

Only controllers of the series 8210, 8220 and 8240 HVAC can be equipped with an analog plug-in module.

821X/822X/824X HVAC (V020)

GND1

62 7 8 9 K11K12K14

GND2

VCC15

5%

3K

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

8279

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

R

-

-

Connection

Voltage supply for the 8279 plug-in module:

Plug the module on the controller.

Bridge terminals 7 and 39.

Note:

With this type of wiring there are 2 or more wires connected to one terminal. To avoid this, provide an external connection facility.

0 ... 10 V

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

K3501421

FIG 4-26 Control connections: Supply with internal control voltage

821X/822X/824X HVAC (V020)

GND1

62 7 8 9 K11K12K14

GND2

VCC15

5%

3K

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

R

K3501422

8279

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

0 ... 10 V

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

12 ... 30V

Danger!

There is no mains isolation between external supply and unit mass.

There is no double mains isolation between the mains and the terminals.

Therefore, the unit is not electrically isolated, i.e. not protected against contact.

Connection

-

-

Voltage supply for the 8279 plug-in module:

Plug the module on the controller.

Bridge terminals 7 and 39.

Note

With this type of wiring there are 2 or more wires connected to one terminal. To avoid this, provide an external connection facility.

FIG 4-27 Control connections: Supply with external control voltage (+12 V ... +30 V)

GND1

GND2

Reference for internal voltages

Reference for external voltages

GND1 and GND2 have a potential isolation inside the unit.

4-42

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4.3

Installation of a CE-typical drive system

General notes

Assembly

Filters

The electromagnetic compatibility of a machine depends on the type of installation and care taken. Please observe:

- Assembly

- Filters

- Screening

-

- Grounding

For diverging installations, the conformity to the CE EMC Directive requires a check of the machine or system regarding the EMC limit values. This is for instance valid for

-

- the use of unscreened cables,

- the use of group RFI filters instead of assigned RFI filters,

- the operation without mains filter.

The compliance of the machine application with the EMC Directive is in the responsibility of the user.

- If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will operate without any EMC problems caused by the drive system, and that compliance with the EMC Directive and the EMC law is achieved.

- If devices which do not comply with the CE requirement concerning noise immunity EN 50082-2 are operated close to the controller, these devices may be disturbed electromagnetically by the controllers.

Connect controller, mains choke, and mains filter to the grounded mounting plate with a wire of large a cross-section as possible:

- Mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc-coated, stainless steel) allow permanent contact.

- Painted plates are not suitable for the installation in accordance with the EMC.

If you use several mounting plates: -

-

-

-

- Connect as much surface as possible of the mounting plates (e.g. with copper bands).

Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.

Do not use the same terminal strip for mains input and motor output.

Cable guides as close as possible to the reference potential. Unguided cables have the same effect as aerials.

Use mains filters or RFI filters and mains chokes which are assigned to the controller:

- RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a permissible value.

- Mains chokes reduce low-frequency interferences which depend on the motor cable and its length.

- Mains filters combine the functions of mains choke and RFI filter.

8200SHB0199

4-43

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Screening Connect the screen of the motor cable to the controller

- to the screen connection of the controller,

-

- additionally to the mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.

- Recommendation: For the connection, use ground clamps on bare metal mounting surfaces.

If contactors, motor-protecting switches or terminals are located in the motor cable:

-

- Connect the screens of the connected cables also to the mounting plate, with a surface as large as possible.

Connect the screen in the motor terminal box or on the motor housing to PE:

- Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a connection of the screen and the motor housing.

If the mains cable between mains filter and controller is longer than 300 mm:

- Screen mains cables.

- Connect the screen of the mains cable directly to the inverter and to the mains filter and connect it to the mounting plate with as large a surface as possible.

-

-

Use of a brake chopper:

- Connect the screen of the brake resistor cable directly to the mounting plate, at the brake chopper and the brake resistor with as large a surface as possible.

- Connect the screen of the cable between controller and brake chopper directly to the mounting plate, at the inverter and the brake chopper with a surface as large as possible.

Screen the control cables:

- Connect both screen ends of the digital control cables.

- Connect one screen end of the analog control cables.

-

- Always connect the screens to the screen connection at the controller over the shortest possible distance.

Application of the controllers 821X/822X/824X in residential areas:

- Use an additional screen damping ˜ 10 dB to limit the radio interference. This is usually achieved by installation in enclosed and grounded control cabinets made of metal.

Grounding Ground all metallically conductive components (controller, mains filter, motor filter, mains choke) using suitable cables connected to a central point (PE bar).

Maintain the minimum cross-sections prescribed in the safety regulations:

- For EMC not the cable cross-section but the surface and the contact with a cross-section as large as possible, are important.

4-44

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

Mains

PE n n

F1

K10 n n

Z1

PE n

PES

PE

RB

PES

Lx

PES

PE

PES

RB1 RB2+UG -UG

PES

+UG

-UG

Z3

PES

U V W PE

PES

PE

PES

82XX

GND 1

Vref

62 7 8 9 K11 K12 K14

K1

Z2

PE

PE

Vcc

GND 2

20 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 39

PES

PES

PES

PES

PE

M

3~ PE

-X1

K35.0082gb

FIG 4-28 Example for an installation in accordance with the EMC regulations:

F1

K10

Z1

Z2

Z3

-X1

RB

PES n

Fuse

Mains contactor

Mains filter ”A” or ”B”, see Accessories

Motor filter/sine filter, see Accessories

Brake module/brake chopper, see Accessories

Terminal strip in control cabinet

Brake resistor

HF screen because auf PE connection with a surface as large as possible (see ”Screening” in this chapter)

Number of phases

8200SHB0199

4-45

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Installation

4-46

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--C

00406183

Manual

Part C

Commissioning

During operation

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5 Commissioning

820X

The controllers are factory-set to drive a corresponding four-pole standard motor with 230/400 V, 50 Hz. Further settings are not necessary.

821X/822X/824X

The controllers are factory-set to drive the following matching four-pole asynchronous standard motors without any further settings:

230/400 V, 50 Hz

-

265/460 V, 60 Hz

-

280/480 V, 60 Hz

Only a few settings via the 8201BB operating module or a fieldbus module are necessary to adapt your drive to your application. The required steps are summarised in chapter 5.3 and chapter 5.4.

Further information about the optimisation of the controller can be obtained from part D, “Configuration”.

5.1

Before switching on

Prior to initial switch-on of the controller, check the wiring for completeness, short-circuit, and earth fault:

-

Power connection:

- Via terminals L1/N - 820X

- Via L1, L2 and L3 - 821X

- Via L1, L2 and L3 - 822X/824X

- Alternatively via terminals +U

G

, -U

G

(DC-group drive)

Control terminals:

- Reference potential for the control terminals is terminal 39.

- Controller enable: Terminal 28

- Selection of direction of rotation: Terminal E3 or E4

- External setpoint selection: Terminals 7, 8

- Check jumper position! Factory setting: 0 - 10 V (see chapter 4.2.8.2).

- During operation with an internal voltage supply via terminal 20, bridge the terminals 7 and 39.

-

In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage only after the visible humidity has evaporated.

-

The plug-in power terminals of the 820X controller must only be connected or disconnected when no voltage is applied.

Keep to the switch-on sequence!

8200SHB0199 5-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.2

Short commissioning (factory setting)

5.2.1

Switch-on sequence

Step

1.Connect to the mains.

2.Enter the direction of rotation.

3.Enter the setpoint.

4.Enable controller.

5.The drive is now running with factory setting.

The controller is ready for operation after approx. 2 seconds.

-

-

CW rotation:

- Apply a LOW signal to terminal E4 (0 ... + 3 V).

CCW rotation:

- Apply a HIGH signal to terminal E4 (+ 12 ... + 30 V).

Apply a voltage 0 ... + 10 V to terminal 8.

Apply a HIGH signal (+ 12 ... + 30 V) to terminal 28.

5.2.2

Factory setting of the most important drive parameters

Setting

Operating mode

Terminal configuration

Code

C001

C007

Factory setting

-0-

-0-

Setpoint selection via terminal 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

E4 E3 E2 E1

CW/CCW DC injection brake JOG1/2/3

Adaptation to the application

See code table, chapter 7.8

for “Standard”

See code table, chapter 7.9

for “HVAC”

See code table, chapter 7.8

for “Standard”

See code table, chapter 7.9

for “HVAC”

Chapter 5.3 ff.

C010 0.00 Hz

C011 50.00 Hz

C012 5.00 s Chapter 5.3.2

Machine data

Speed range Min. field frequency

Max. field frequency

Acceleration Acceleration time

Deceleration time times

Motor mode

Generator mode

Drive performance

Operating mode

C013

C022

C023

C014

5.00 s

150 %

80 %

820X -0-

821X/822X/

824X

V/f-rated frequency

V min

-setting

820X

C015

-4-

50.0 Hz typedependent

0 % 821X/822X/

824X

Slip compensation C021 0 %

Linear characteristic V f d boost

Motor-current control with auto

Chapter 5.4 ff.

V/f-characteristic control

-

-

5.4.2.2

5-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.3

Adapt machine data

5.3.1

Determine speed range (f dmin, f dmax)

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C010 Minimum field frequency

820X 0.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

0.00

0.00

C011 Maximum field frequency

820X 50.00

30.00

821X/822X/

824X

50.00

7.50

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

480.00

480.00

480.00

480.00

Info

Function

Adjustment

Important

IMPORTANT

The speed range required for the application can be selected via the input of field frequencies f dmin and f dmax

:

f dmin corresponds to the speed at 0 % speed setpoint selection.

f dmax corresponds to the speed at 100 % speed setpoint selection.

Relation between field frequency and synchronous motor speed: n

Nsyn f dmax p

ô 60 f n

Nsyn

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 p dmax

Max. field frequency [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

]

Example: 4 pole asynchronous motor: p = 2, f dmax

= 50 Hz n

Nsyn

50 ô 60

2

1500 min

1

-

-

-

-

f f

With the setting of f dmin dmax

> f dmax

, the field frequency is limited to f

With setpoint selection via JOG values, f dmax is an internal normalisation variable: acts as limitation.

dmax

.

- Use the LECOM interface only for important modifications, when the controller is inhibited.

Observe the maximum speed of the motor!

dmin is only effective:

- With analog setpoint input.

- With the motor potentiometer function ”DOWN”.

Special features

C011

(fdmax) fd

C010

(fdmin)

0 % 100 %

8200SHB0199

5-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.3.2

Setting of acceleration and deceleration times (T ir

, T if

)

IMPORTANT Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C012 Acceleration time

820X 5.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

5.00

0.00

C013 Deceleration time

820X 5.00

0.00

5.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

C012 Acceleration time

C013 Deceleration time

5.00

5.00

0.00

0.00

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

Info

999.00 T ir

999.00

999.00 T ir

999.00

1300.00 T ir

1300.00 T if

Variant “Standard”

Variant “Standard”

Function

Adjustment

The acceleration and deceleration times determine the controller response after a setpoint change.

The acceleration and deceleration times refer to a change of the field frequency from 0 Hz to the max. field frequency set under C011.

Calculate the times T ir

- t ir and t if and T if

, which must be set under C012 and C013.

are the times desired for the change between f d1 and f d2

.

Important

7

LU

W

LU

ô

I

I

GPD[

G

I

G

7

LI

W

LI

ô

I

I

GPD[

G

I

G

Under unfavourable operating conditions, too short acceleration and deceleration times can lead to the deactivation of the controller under overload with the indication of TRIP OC5. In these cases, the acceleration and deceleration times should be set such that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching I max of the controller.

f f dmax d2 fd1

0 tir

T ir

FIG 5-1 Acceleration and deceleration times tif

T if t

5-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.3.3

Setting of current limit values (I max limits)

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C022 I max limit

(motor mode)

C023 I max limit

(generator mode)

150

80

30

30

822X/824X 80 30

C023 I max limit

(generator mode)

80 30

{1 %}

{1 %}

{1 %}

{1 %}

150

Info

110

IMPORTANT

Standard controllers

150 As of software 1.6

150 Variant “HVAC”

Function The controllers are equipped with a current-limit control which determines the dynamic response under load. The measured load is compared with the limit values set under C022 for motor load and under C023 for generator load. If the current limits are exceeded, the controller changes its dynamic behaviour.

Adjustment Set the acceleration and deceleration times so that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching I max

.

Controller behaviour when a limit value is reached

During acceleration:

- Increasing the acceleration ramp

During deceleration:

-

- Increasing the deceleration ramp

With increasing load and constant speed:

- When reaching the generator-current limit value:

Increase of the field frequency to the max. frequency (C011).

- When reaching the motor-current limit value:

Lower the field frequency until the drive load is reduced.

- Stop the field frequency change if the load falls below the limit value.

Important

821X/822X/824X A correct current control in the generator mode is possible only with a connected brake unit or in the DC-bus connection with energy exchange.

For operation with chopper frequencies > 8 kHz, the current limit values should be set to the currents ”I max for 60 s” (see chapter 3.4).

(Derating at higher chopper frequencies.)

8200SHB0199

5-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4

Optimisation of the operating behaviour

The following settings are used to determine the current and torque behaviour as well as the performance of the connected motor.

Choose between the control modes ”Motor current control” and

”V/f-characteristic control”. Information to help you with the selection can be obtained from chapter 5.4.1.

5.4.1

Select control mode

Code

C014 ¤

Function

Name

Control mode

Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

Control modes of the voltage characteristic

IMPORTANT

820X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Linear characteristic V f d auto boost with

Square characteristic V f d

2 auto boost with

Linear characteristic V f d constant V min constant V min boost boost with

Square characteristic V f d

2 with

Motor-current control 821X/822X/

824X

-4-4-

-

-

-

Under C014 you can set the control mode and the voltage characteristic.

The V/f-characteristic control with auto boost enables a low-loss operation of stand-alone drives with standard three-phase AC motors with load-dependent V min boost.

The motor-current control enables a ”Sensorless Speed Control”. Compared to the

V/f-characteristic control, the drive can operate with a considerably higher torque and less current consumption during idle running.

C014 = -2-

Linear characteristic

V o u t

1 0 0 %

C014 = -3-

Square characteristic (e.g. for pumps, fans)

V o u t

1 0 0 % m i n f d f d r m i n f d f d r

5-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Help for the selection of 820X

Stand-alone drives with constant load with extremely alternating loads with heavy start conditions positioning and infeed drives with high dynamic response hoists pumps and blowers three-phase AC reluctance motors three-phase sliding rotor motors three-phase motors with fixed frequency-voltage characteristic

Group drives (depending on the resulting motor-cable length) identical motors and identical loads different motors and/or changing loads

Motor cable shielded $ 25 m unshielded $ 50 m shielded > 25 m unshielded > 50 m

C014 recommended alternatively recommended alternatively

-0-

-0-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-0-

-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-2-

-3-

-

-

-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-3-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-

-

-

-

-2-

l res

-2-

-2-

(l

1 l

2

ööö l i

)

-

-

-2-

-2-

-

-

Help to decide for 821X/822X/824X

Single drives with constant load with extremely alternating loads with heavy start conditions positioning and infeed drives with high dynamic response hoists pumps and blowers three-phase AC reluctance motors three-phase sliding rotor motors three-phase motors with fixed frequency-voltage characteristic

Group drives (depending on the resulting motor-cable length) identical motors and identical loads different motors and/or changing loads

* 8211: shielded $ 15 m, unshielded $ 30 m

8212: shielded $ 25 m, unshielded $ 50 m

Motor cable* shielded $ 50 m unshielded $ 100 m shielded > 50 m unshielded > 100 m

C014 recommended alternatively recommended alternatively

-4-

-4-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-4-

-2-

-4-

-2-

-

-2-/-4-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-

-

-3-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-

-

-3-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-2-

-

-

l res

-4-

-2-

(l

1 l

2

ööö l i

)

-2-

-

-2-

-2-

-

8200SHB0199

5-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4.2

Optimising operating modes

5.4.2.1

Optimising motor-current control (C014 = -4-)

820X setting range: Function is not available

821X/822X/824X setting range:

Required codes

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C015 V/f rated frequency 50.00

7.50

C021 Slip compensation

C088 Rated motor current

0.0

0.0

{0.02 Hz}

{0.1 %}

* 0.0 ... 2.0

k rated output current

C091 Motor cos j * 0.40

{0.01}

IMPORTANT

Info

960.00

20.0

* depends on Input only necessary

1.00

adapted

Setting sequence Drives with matching 4-pole standard motors 230/400 V in star connection must not be connected. After having started the drive, the controller itself detects all further motor data.

The following drives can be optimised by entering the nameplate data ”rated motor current” and

”cos j ” under C088 or C091:

- Motor, one power class smaller than the motor assigned to the controller.

- Motor, one or two power classes smaller than the motor assigned to the controller.

- Drives with 2, 6, 8, 10 and 12 pole standard motors.

-

- Drives with special motors.

The sensorless speed control can be optimised for your application with the ”sensorless speed control”.

1.If necessary, select

C014 = -4-.

2.Select V/f-rated frequency

(C015).

(Factory setting)

Adjustment

Calculate the frequency to be set under C015:

C015 [Hz]

V

400 V rmotor

[V]

ô f r

[Hz]

V rmotor f dr

Rated voltage to motor nameplate [V]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

For standard motors with f dr

= 50 Hz, the following settings result for C015:

Motor voltage

230/400 V

230/400 V

Motor connection

Y

D

C015

50 Hz

87 Hz

3.If necessary, parameterise

C088, C091.

These motor data must only be entered for non-matching motors.

5-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Important

Commissioning s

Rough setting according to motor data: n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r

ô 100 % f dr

ô

60 p s n

Nsyn n r f dr p

Slip constant (C021)

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 ]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1 ]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

-

-

Precise setting:

Correct C021 until no load-dependent speed drop occurs in the required speed range between idle running and max. motor load.

If the values under C021 are too high, the drive may become instable (overcompensation).

In the field frequency range between 5 Hz ... 50 Hz (87 Hz) the deviation of the rated speed is

$ 1 % (guide value). In field-weakening operation, the fault increases.

The change from V/f-characteristic control to motor-current control should only be carried out when the controller is inhibited.

-

-

The idle current of the motor (magnetising current) must not exceed the rated current of the controller.

With very small friction values, it is possible that a phase offset of up to 180 • occurs at the motor shaft when enabling the controller.

8200SHB0199

5-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4.2.2

Optimise V/f-characteristic control with auto boost

(C014 = -0-/ -1-)

821X/822X/824X setting range:

820X setting range:

Function is not available

Required codes

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C015 V/f-rated frequency 50.00

30.00

C016 V min setting

C021 Slip compensation

* 0.00

0.0

0.0

Setting sequence

1.If necessary, select V/f characteristic with auto boost

(C014 = -0- or -1-).

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 %}

{0.1 %}

960.00

40.00

12.0

Info

IMPORTANT

*depends on the unit

2.Select V/f-rated frequency

(C015).

The V/f-rated frequency determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable influence on the current, torque and power performance of the motor.

An internal mains voltage compensation compensates deviations in the mains during operation.

Therefore, they do not have to be considered for the setting of C015.

Use standard motors with 230/400 V with a connection, since with an input voltage of 230 V a max. of 3AC 230 V is at the output.

Adjustment

Calculate the frequency to be set under C015:

C015 [Hz]

V

230 V rmotor

[V]

ô f dr

[Hz] f

V rmotor dr

Rated voltage to motor nameplate [V]

Observe the connection mode (e.g. with a motor voltage to nameplate 230/400 V / D

V rmotor

= 230 V AC.

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

C014 = -0-

Linear characteristic

C014 = -1-

Square characteristic (e.g. for pumps, fans) o u t r m o t o r o u t r m o t o r

K 3 5 . 0 0 6 6 G B m i n

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r m i n

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r

5-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

3.Set V min boost (C016).

Load-dependent boost of the motor voltage in the field frequency range below the V/f-rated frequency. C016 acts as gain factor of the auto-boost function.

Adjustment

In general, an adjustment is not necessary. An optimisation can be advantageous:

For drives with very high starting torques:

A Operate the motor under load.

B Select the frequency setpoint.

C Increase V min until the required motor current (torque) occurs.

If the setting of V min

”overcurrent” (OCx).

is too high, a positive-feedback effect can occur and activate the TRIP

For drives with square load torques (fans, pumps):

A Operate the motor under load.

B Select the frequency setpoint.

C Adapt V min until the motor is running steadily and smoothly over the whole frequency range.

If the setting of V min is too high, the TRIP ”overcurrent” (OCx) can be activated and lead to an excessive motor temperature.

For drives with special motors:

A Operate the motor under load.

B Select the frequency setpoint.

C Increase V min until the required motor current (torque) occurs.

If the setting of V min is too high, a positive-feedback effect can occur and activate the TRIP

”overcurrent” (OCx).

D Check the current consumption during idle running when no load is applied.

s

Rough setting according to motor data: n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r

ô 100 % s n

Nsyn f dr

ô 60 p n

Nsyn n r f dr p

Slip constant (C021)

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 ]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1 ]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

-

-

Precise setting:

Correct C021 until no load-dependent speed drop occurs in the required speed range between idle running and max. motor load.

If the values under C021 are too high, the drive may become instable (overcompensation).

In the field frequency range between 5 Hz ... 50 Hz (87 Hz) the deviation of the rated speed is

$ 1 % (guide value). In field-weakening operation, the fault increases.

8200SHB0199

5-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4.2.3

Optimise V/f-characteristic control with constant V min

(C014 = -2-/ -3-) boost

Required codes

Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

Standard controllers

820X 50.00

30.0

821X/822X/

824X

50.00

7.50

C015 V/f-rated frequency 50.00

7.50

C016 min setting

820X * 0.0

821X/822X/

824X

0.0

0.0

820X 0.0

0.0

821X/822X/

824X

0.0

0.0

0.0

-50.0

C077* Gain I max controller

C078* Integral action time

I max controller

0.25

0.00

65 12

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.2 %}

{0.2 %}

{0.1 %}

{0.1 %}

{0.01}

{1 ms}

960.00

960.00

960.00

40.0

40.0

12.0

20.0

1.00

9990

Variant “HVAC”

*depends on the unit

Standard controllers

Setting sequence

1.If necessary, select V/f characteristic (C014).

2.Select V/f-rated frequency

(C015).

-

-

The V/f-rated frequency determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable influence on the current, torque and power performance of the motor.

An internal mains voltage compensation compensates deviations in the mains during operation.

Therefore, they do not have to be considered for the setting of C015.

Adjustment

Calculate the frequency to be set under C015:

C015 [Hz]

V

400 V rmotor

[V]

ô f dr

[Hz]

V rmotor f dr

Rated voltage to motor nameplate [V]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

For standard motors with f dr

= 50 Hz, the following settings result for C015:

Motor voltage

230/400 V

230/400 V

Motor connection

Y

D

C015

50 Hz

87 Hz

5-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

C014 = -2-

Linear characteristic o u t r m o t o r

C014 = -3-

Square characteristic (e.g. for pumps, fans) o u t r m o t o r

3.Set V min boost (C016).

m i n m i n

K 3 5 . 0 0 6 6 G B

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r

Load-independent boost of the motor voltage for field frequencies below the V/f-rated frequency. It is thus possible to optimise the torque performance of the inverter drive.

It is absolutely necessary to adapt C016 to the asynchronous motor used. Otherwise the motor may be overheated or the inverter may be operated with overcurrent.

Adjustment

Observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous motor at low field frequencies when adjusting it:

-

-

Usually, self-ventilated standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be driven for a short time with rated frequency with the frequency range between 0 Hz ˆ f d

ˆ 25 Hz.

Contact the motor manufacturer for exact setting values for the max. permissible motor current in the lower frequency range of self-ventilated motors.

A Operate the motor in idle running with f d

- P mot

$ 7.5 kW: f d

5 Hz

- P mot

7.5 kW: f d

2 Hz

Detect the slip frequency: f s f dr

ô n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r n

Nsyn f dr

ô 60 p f s f dr n

Nsyn n r p slip frequency:

Slip frequency [Hz]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 ]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1 ]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

B Increase V min until the following motor current is reached:

- Motor in short-term operation at 0 Hz ˆ f

Self-ventilated motors:

Forced-ventilated motors:

Self-ventilated motors:

Forced-ventilated motors:

I

I

I motor motor

ˆ I r motor

- Motor in continuous operation at 0 Hz ˆ f d motor

I motor

ˆ d

ˆ I

ˆ 25 Hz:

ˆ I r motor

ˆ

0.8

25 Hz: k r motor

I r motor

8200SHB0199

5-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Important s

Rough setting according to motor data: n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r

ô 100 % f dr

ô 60 p s n

Nsyn n r f dr p

Slip constant (C021) [%]

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 ]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1 ]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

-

-

Precise setting:

Correct C021 until no load-dependent speed drop occurs in the required speed range between idle running and max. motor load.

If the values under C021 are too high, the drive may become instable (overcompensation).

In the field frequency range between 5 Hz ... 50 Hz (87 Hz) the deviation of the rated speed is

$ 1 % (guide value). In field-weakening operation, the fault increases.

The change from V/f-characteristic control and motor-current control should only be carried out when the controller is inhibited.

5-14

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4.2.4

Normalisation of an application datum

820X setting range: Function not available.

Setting range 821X/822X/824X:

C500* Display factor

Application datum numerator

C501* Display factor

Application datum denominator

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

2000 1

10 1

{1}

{1}

25000

Info

25000

Function

Adjustment

Example

Important

Adaptation of field-frequency related parameters

C010, C011, C017, C019, C037, C038, C039, C046, C049, C050 and

for controllers of the “HVAC” series C051, C181, C625, C626, C627 additionally to an application datum to be controlled, e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate, humidity or speed.

-

-

The normalisation implements an absolute or relative selection or display of an application datum, is always carried out simultaneously for all codes indicated.

The display value is calculated from:

CXXX

C011

200

ô

C500

C501

The speed setpoint is to be input and displayed as relative or absolute value.

Values: P set

= 5 bar, if f dmax

= 50 Hz (C011) a) Relative normalisation in %

100.00 (%)

50

200

ô

4000

10 e.g. C500 = 4000, C501 = 10 b) Absolute normalisation in physical units

5.00 (bar)

50

200

ô 200

10 e.g. C500 = 200; C501 = 10

-

-

All codes indicated above are normalised at the same time.

After a normalisation, the output frequency [Hz] (C050) can only be recalculated with the display factors C500 and C501.

8200SHB0199

5-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.4.3

Operation with PID controller

The following controls can be implemented with the internal PID controller:

pressure,

temperature,

flow rate,

speed,

dancer-position controls.

Configuration

Functions

Set C005 = -6- or -7- for controlled operation with a PID controller

Variables

Influence and setpoint precontrol

-

-

-

-

C070 = gain

C071 = integral action time

C072 = differential component

The I component of the controller can be reset when reaching the Q min suppress the initial conditions because of the missing actual value.

threshold (C017), to

-

-

Set the PID controller influence under C074.

Select whether setpoint precontrol is to be used under C238.

-

- The setpoint precontrol is advantageous for applications which provide an actual value signal which is directly proportional to the speed of the drive. The influence of the PID controller can then be limited that only the maximum expectable slip of the machine will be controlled.

For application where the PID controller is used as process controller, the settings C238 = -0-

(without setpoint precontrol) and C074 = 100 % are required.

Setpoint input Enter a fixed setpoint under C181:

- For instance, for dancer position control to select the dancer position.

Via terminal 8 or terminal E1.

The setpoint can be selected either via terminal 8 or terminal E1. The terminal not used for setpoint selection is used for the feedback.

With the analog plug-in module 8279IB terminal E1 is used as 2nd analog input

(0 ... 10 V / 0/4 ... 20 mA).

Without the analog plug-in module 8279IB terminal E1 can be used as digital input (pulse frequency 0 kHz ... 10 kHz, LOW level = 0 V ... 3 V, HIGH level = 12 V ... 30 V).

Adjustment The adjustment of the analog inputs limits the control range.

C026 and C027:

- Adjustment terminal 8.

C426 and C427:

- Adapt C426 and C427 if a 4 ... 20 mA signal is assigned via terminal E1 (8279IB).

Actual value C051 indicates the actual value of the PID controller.

5-16

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Im t Rese

+ +

10n

50k

12 k 100

250R

56

34

8200SHB0199

5-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.5

Application examples for PID controllers

5.5.1

Pump application with pressure control

Frequency inverter 8210/8220/8240

Analog display for actual pressure

L 2101

Pressure setpoint e.g. from PC/PLC/ keypad

Actual pressure

Fault message e.g. PLC

62

7

8

9

K11

K12

K14

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

Ctrl.

enable

Down

Up

JOG

H/RE

p

+

Pressure sensor

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

(external aux. energy/ supply required

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Z2

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

Pump

Z1

K1

F1

PE L1L2L3

K35.0144_gba

FIG 5-2 Application of a pump with pressure control

Z1

Z2

Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions in chapters 4.2 and 4.3.

5-18

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Sensor connection

3-phase pressure sensor

‚

 ~

2

+ -

+

-

ƒ

7

8

2-phase pressure sensor

‚



+

-

~

2

+ -

ƒ

7

8

3-phase pressure sensor with supply via controller



+

-

RFR

‚

28

20

39

7

8

Vcc

GND 2

GND 1

1.DC mains supply, e.g. 24 V

2.Pressure sensor

0 - 10 V (jumper 1-2)

0 - 20 mA (jumper 5-6)

4 - 20 mA (jumper 5-6, C034 = 1)

3.Controller

1.DC mains supply, e.g. 24 V

2.Pressure sensor

4 - 20 mA (jumper 5-6, C034 = 1)

250 R load

3.Controller

1.Pressure sensor

4 - 20 mA (jumper 5-6, C034 = 1)

250 R load

2.Controller

Note:

Since terminal 20 can be loaded with max.

20 mA, the digital inputs

E1 ... E4 must not be addressed.

Application FIG 5-2:

A centrifugal pump is used to ensure constant pressure in a pipeline system (e.g.

for water supply of residential and industrial premises).

The application does not only require remote control from a central operating panel but also setting possibilities at site. The pressure is to be reduced to a fixed value during times when only few water is required. Thus, indirectly possible burst pipes can be detected by monitoring the actual pressure.

8200SHB0199

5-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Functions used

-

Internal PID controller for pressure control.

- Regular control, setpoint selection via fieldbus with feedback via analog channel terminal 8.

-

Networking via fieldbus (e.g. via plug-in module 2102).

-

Manual/remote changeover (H/Re).

- Setpoint selection change via key ( E1 = DOWN / E2 = UP).

Process setpoint selection (e.g. pressure [p]) via inverter JOG value.

-

Electrical controller inhibit (Ctrl. enable).

Code settings:

Code Name

C001 Operating mode

C005 Configuration

C007 Terminal configuration

C037 JOG value 1

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-

-0-

-3-

-7-

Setpoint selection - control, parameter setting via LECOM

Controlled operation, with analog feedback via term. 8

-0-26Motor potentiometer, JOG,

H/Re

20.00

16.67 HzFixed reduction to 1/3 of the rated pressure

Info

C051 Actual PID controller value Only display of actual pressure

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time PID controller

C072 Differential component PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C111 ¤ Monitor signal

C238 Frequency precontrol

C239 Frequency setting range

1.00

100

0.0

0.02 ... 0.1

0.2 ... 1 s

0.0

0.0

100.0 %

-0-8Actual PID controller value

-1-

-0-

-0-

-1-

No precontrol

Unipolar

Inactive

Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos j ) depending on the motor connected.

In addition to the setpoint input via fieldbus, the pressure setpoint can also be selected via the 8201BB keypad

(installation up to max. 10 m away from the controller) or via an analog input signal (using the 8274 plug-in module).

Note!

-

For more detailed information on the process controller see chapter 7.5.10.

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 5.4.2.4).

5-20

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.5.2

L

Pump application with level control

Water level setpoint

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

7

8

STP

SH PRG

RUN

20

28

E1

39

Ctrl.

enable

Z2

+

-

Pressure sensor

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

(external aux. energy/ supply required

Delivery pump

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

Intake

Z1

Water reservoir

Outlet

K1

F1

PE L1 L2 L3

K35.0145_gba

FIG 5-3 Application of a pump with level control

Z1 Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Z2 Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions given in chapters 4.2

and 4.3.

8200SHB0199

5-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Application FIG 5-3:

In a tank the water is to be held at a constant level. The speed of the pump must be controlled depending on the amount of water delivered.

Functions used

-

Internal PID controller for level control.

- Regular control, analog setpoint selection via terminal 8 with feedback via analog channel E1 with plug-in module 8279IB.

Code settings:

C005 Configuration

C007 ¤ Terminal configuration

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time

PID controller

C072 Differential component of PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C238 ¤ Frequency precontrol

C239 ¤ Frequency setting range

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-6Operation with closed-loop control; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

-0-28- ... -45- or -48- ... -51-

Info

1.00

100

0.0

0.0

-1-

-0-

0.02 ... 0.1

0.2 ... 1 s

0

100.0 %

-0-

-1-

No precontrol

Unipolar

Act. level value via terminal E1

Inactive

Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

For the level setpoint observe the jumper setting at terminal 8 (see chapter 5.5.1).

Set 4 - 20 mA code C034 = 1.

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos j ) depending on the motor connected.

Note!

-

Adapt C426 and C427 if the actual value input is 4 mA ... 20 mA.

(See chapter 3.7.1 and chapter 7.5.14.9).

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 5.4.2.4).

5-22

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.5.3

L

Dancer-position control (line drive)

V

1

V

2

7

8

9

SH PRG

STP

RUN

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

Ctrl.

enable

QSP

JOG1

INFL_0

R1 Dancer potentiometer

1 ... 10 kOhm

5V E

S

R1

A

Main setpoint ~ V

1

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

Z2

F

G

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

Z1

K1

F1

PE L1 L2 L3

FIG 5-4 Application of a dancer-position control

Z1 Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Z2 Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions given in chapters 4.2

and 4.3.

8200SHB0199

5-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Code Name

Application FIG 5-4:

The material speed v

2 is to be synchronised to the line speed v

1 by means of a dancer-position control. The dancer-position setpoint is internally set.

Functions used

-

Internal PID controller as position controller.

-

Selection of the line speed v

1 via terminal 8.

-

Actual dancer-position value from the dancer potentiometer via the analog plug-in module 8279IB.

-

Set-up speed via terminal Klemme E3 (JOG1).

-

Switch-off of the influence of the dancer controller via terminal E4 (externally) or internally via Q min

(C017) and C008 = 7.

Code settings:

C005 Configuration

C007 Terminal configuration

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-6Controlled operation; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

Info

-0-49-

Jumper setting for terminal 8 must be adapted to 5 V (see chapter 4.2.8.2).

Actual dancer position via terminal E1

C037 JOG value 1 20.00

Fixed set-up speed v

1 for material guidance, individually adjustable

1.00

100

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time PID controller

C072 Differential component PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C105 Deceleration time QSP

0.0

0.0

10.0 %

5.00

Enter approx. 1 s

C181 Setpoint PID controller

C239 Frequency setting range

0.0

Set the dancer to the position required,

C051 = read the actual dancer value and store it under C181.

-0-1Unipolar

E.g. emergency-off function:

The drive geometry must be adjusted so that it is possible to brake the controller to standstill within a very short time. A brake chopper might be required.

C181 must not be 0, because here the position setpoint is generated by the main setpoint.

Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller.

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

Adapt the jumper setting to the main setpoint signal (see chapter 5.5.1).

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos Ö ) depending to the motor connected.

5-24

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Note!

For more detailed information on the process controller, see chapter

7.5.10.

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 5.4.2.4).

Notes for the adjustment of the dancer controller:

Set the gain Vp (C070), the integral action time T

N

(C071) and the differential component (C072) so that the original position can be reached quickly with only minimum overshooting, if the dancer is adjusted manually (change of the act.

value).

For the adjustment start with code C070, then set C071 and C072. C071 must be deactivated (via terminal E4) when setting C070. C072 must be deactivated (via

0) for setting C071.

8200SHB0199

5-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

5.5.4

Air conditioning system

L1

L2

L3

8210/8220/8240 with 8201BB keypad

L

7

8

SH PRG

STP

RUN

Speed setpoint

Control

DCC

20

28

E3

39

Ctrl.

enable

X1

W

V

U

Unit 1

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Z2

M

3~

Belt

Condensation unit

7

8

STP

SH PRG

RUN

20

28

Speed setpoint

Control

DCC

Water injection

-

Circulating pump

Water filters

-

Ctrl.

enable

M

3~

39

W V U

X1

Unit 2

Z1 Z2

F1 K1

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Z1

Hot water

Cold water

Heat exchanger

FIG 5-5 Application example of an air conditioning system

Z1

Z2

Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions in chapters 4.2 and 4.3.

5-26

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Application FIG 5-5:

The air conditioning system of a department store is to be controlled according to the number of persons present. The fans must circulate an amount of air that depends on the number of people (e.g. data provided by a person counter).

Functions used

-

-

-

Belt monitoring

Flying-restart circuit on coasting motor

Suppression of mechanical resonances

Smooth start and stop with S-ramps

Code settings for unit 1:

C001 Operating mode

C005 Configuration

C008 Function relay K1

C014 Control mode

C142 Start condition

C156 Current threshold

C182 t integration

RFG S-shape

C625 Skip frequency 1

C628 Skipping bandwidth, f skip

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-0Setpoint selection via term. 8 (jumper setting, se chapter 4.2.8.2)

Control via terminals parameter setting with 8201BB

-0-

-1-

-0-

-1-

-0Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

-14Apparent motor current (C054) < Current threshold

C156 and acceleration finished (Belt monitoring)

-3-

-3-

Square characteristic V f d

2 with constant V min boost

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit active

50 % 0

0.00

0.50 s Smooth start / stop

480.00

30.00 HzRemoval of mechanical resonances

0.00

10.00 %

Info

Procedure for setting skip frequencies

Stop!

If the mechanical resonance points are approached, the mechanics may be damaged.

1. Remain C625 to C628 in factory setting.

2. Detect mechanical resonances (if not already known).

3. Detect the bandwidth of the mechanical resonances.

4. Set C625 to C628 according to the data available.

Note!

Terminal E3 must always be at L level (PAR2: normal operation; PAR1: QSP).

8200SHB0199

5-27

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Commissioning

Code settings for unit 2:

C001 Operating mode

C005 Configuration

C014 Control mode

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-0-

-0-

-0-

-0-

-3-

Setpoint selection via term. 8 (jumper setting, see chapter 4.2.8.2)

Control via terminals parameter setting with

8201BB

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

Square characteristic V f d

2

V min boost with constant

Info

According to the information given in both tables (code setting for unit 1 and 2):

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

5-28

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6 During operation

6.1

Operating information

6.1.1

General

-

Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied.

There are no fuses in the controller.

-

With cyclic mains connection and disconnection:

- Do not switch on the controller more than every three minutes, otherwise the internal initial-current limitation can be overloaded.

-

Switching on the motor side:

- Permissible for emergency switch-off.

- Monitoring messages can be activated when switching the motor when the controller is enabled.

The plug-in connection terminals of the 820X controllers must only be connected or disconnected when no voltage is applied.

-

Depending on the controller settings, the connected motor can be overheated:

- For instance, longer DC-braking operations.

- Longer operation of self-ventilated motors at low speed.

With the corresponding parameter setting, the controllers reach an output frequency of up to 480 Hz:

- If an inappropriate motor is connected, a hazardous overspeed may occur.

- With frequencies > 240 Hz, the overcurrent switch-off of the 820X controllers can be activated.

-

With the function CW/CCW (selection of the direction of rotation) in configuration C007 = -0- ... -13-, -23 ... -45-:

- The drive can reverse the direction of rotation in the event of a control-voltage failure or a cable break.

-

If the function ”flying-restart circuit” (C142 = -2-, -3-) is used with machines with low inertia torque and friction:

- After the controller has been enabled in standstill, the motor can start for a short time or reverse the direction of rotation.

8200SHB0199

6-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

During operation

6.1.2

6.1.3

822X/824X

The controllers 822X/824X have a temperature-dependent fan circuit:

- The fans are only activated when the heat sink temperature, which is a fixed factory setting, is exceeded.

8218-V003

-

For use of the variant 8218-V003 with the Lenze convection cooling system:

- Depending on the application conditions, the temperature monitoring

(message ”OH”) can be activated during low-noise operation with a

16 kHz chopper frequency (C018=-5-).

6.2

Display of the controller status

During operation without an operating module, the operating state of the controller is displayed on two LEDs at the front of the unit.

off off off

LED green on on blinking red off on off blinking every second blinking every 0.4 seconds off

Operating status

Controller enabled

Mains switched on and automatic start inhibited (AS_LC)

Controller inhibited

Fault message

Undervoltage switch-off

Programming mode (only 820X)

6-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--D

00406184

Manual

Part D

Configuration

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7 Configuration

The configuration of the controller is used to adapt the drive to your applications.

For this, you have the following functions available:

- Operating functions

- Control functions

- Display functions

- Monitoring functions

-

The possible settings for the functions are organised in codes:

- Codes are numerically sorted, starting from the code with the smallest number to the one with the highest number. All codes start with a ”C”.

- They are listed in the code table.

- Each codes provides parameters, which can be used to adjust and optimise your drive.

-

The configuration of the controller can be entered by means of the keypad of the 8201BB operating module or by means of a fieldbus via the serial interface.

- The operating module and fieldbus modules are available as accessories.

8200SHB0199 7-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.1

8201BB operating module

(Not included in the delivery package, see Accessories).

The 8201BB operating module is equipped with a 5-digit LCD and 6 function keys.

Functions:

-

Parameter setting

-

Display

-

Setpoint selection via keypad

-

Controller inhibit and enable via keypad

-

Parameter transfer with other controllers of the same type series.

- The parameter transfer with other type series is not possible because of the different code sets!

The operating module can be attached or detached during operation.

7-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

FIG 7-1

LOAD

A

%

Hz

Key functions

”SH + ” means:

1.Press and hold key SH.

2.Press second key indicated.

Key

PRG

SH

SH + ▲

SH + ▼

SH + PRG

STP

RUN

Function

Change between operating and code level

Change between code and parameter level

Increase display value

Decrease display value

Increase display value rapidly

Decrease display value rapidly

Store changes

(each parameter can be stored individually before mains disconnection)

Inhibit controller

Enable controller

Status display

(For fault messages see chapter 8)

Display

OV

LV

IMAX

TEMP

PAR1

PAR2

SET

Meaning

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

Current limit exceeded

Heat sink temperature near switch-off ( J max

-10 • C)

Parameter set 1 active, PAR1 blinking: Programming possible

Parameter set 2 active, PAR2 blinking: Programming possible

Setpoint input via keypad

STO dC_b

LU

SET1

SET2 rEAd1 rEAd2

5-digit, 7-segment display

Display

OFF

STOP

AS_LC

STOE

Meaning

Controller inhibited by a LOW signal at terminal 28

Controller inhibited (by STP key or quick stop function or field frequency f d

= 0 Hz)

Autostart-Lockout, controller will only be enabled after a low-high edge at terminal 28.

The parameter will be stored.

DC injection brake active

Undervoltage

Parameter set 1 will be overwritten with the factory setting.

Parameter set 2 will be overwritten with the factory setting.

Parameter set 1 will be overwritten with the data of the operating module.

Parameter set 2 will be overwritten with the data of the operating module.

The parameter sets PAR1 and PAR2 will be transferred to the operating module.

Bar-graph display

The bottom line of the LCD shows the controller load:

6 0 %

8 0 %

1 0 0 %

1 6 0 % g e n e r a t i v e n o

2 0 %

4 0 % l o a d l o a d l o a d o v e r l o a d l o a d l o a d l o a d l o a d

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

L O A D

8201BB operating modules - functions, displays

8200SHB0199

7-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.2

Structure of the operating program

The operating program has three program levels: operating level, code level, and parameter level. The controller parameters are set in the code level and the parameter level.

FIG 7-2 Flow chart for parameter setting

7.2.1

7.2.2

Operating level

-

The controller is in the operating level after mains connection.

-

You can see the switch-on display (C004).

-

You can change to the code level by pressing the key PRG.

Code level

-

In the code level you select a code by pressing ▲ or ▼ .

-

Change to the parameter level by pressing the key SH.

7-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.2.3

Parameter level

-

The parameter level contains two parameter sets, PAR1 and PAR2. Press the key SH to change from PAR1 to PAR2.

-

Each code provides parameters which can be used for drive adjustment.

- The blinking of PAR1 or PAR2 indicates in which parameter set you are.

-

There are four different parameter types:

- Absolute physical values

(e.g. 400 V, 10 s)

- Relative physical values

(e.g. 50 % setpoint)

- Numbers for certain states

(e.g. -0- = controller inhibited, -1- = controller enabled)

- Display values

These values can be displayed but not changed.

(e.g. motor-current).

-

Absolute and relative values can be modified in discrete steps. The steps can change in the parameter-setting range.

Example: Acceleration time T ir

(C012):

3 steps in the whole parameter setting range

- T ir of 0.0 2 s ... 1 s (step 0.02 s, with 820X step 0.05 s)

- T ir of 1 s ... 10 s (step 0.1 s)

- T ir of 10 s ... 100 s (step 1 s)

7.3

Change and store parameters

Each code with parameters which can be changed is factory set. There are three possibilities, depending on the code, to change a parameter:

Labelling in code table

Acceptance and storage without acknowledgement

Acceptance and storage acknowledged with SH + PRG

Cxxx

Cxxx ¤

Acceptance and storage acknowledged with SH + PRG at controller inhibit [Cxxx]

-

Parameters can be changed when the controller is enabled.

-

Changes of the operating parameters are accepted ONLINE.

Parameters, which influence the initialisation of the controller, must be acknowledged with SH+PRG.

Note!

Overwriting of the parameter sets (C002) is only possible when the controller is inhibited.

8200SHB0199

7-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.3.1

Change and store parameters with the 8201BB operating module

Acceptance without acknowledgement (ONLINE)

The controller accepts the changed parameter immediately.

1. Change from the operating level to the code level by pressing PRG.

2. Select a code with ▲ or ▼ .

3. Change to parameter set PAR1 by pressing SH.

- If necessary, press SH again to change to parameter set PAR 2.

4. If PAR1 or PAR2 is blinking, change the parameter with ▲ or ▼ .

- The controller accepts the changed parameter immediately.

- This is also possible during operation of the drive.

5. Change to the code level by pressing SH.

6. Change to the operating level by pressing PRG.

The changed parameter is now stored permanently.

Acceptance acknowledged with SH + PRG

(Labelled with ”

¤

” in the code table.)

The controller accepts the changed parameter only after pressing SH+PRG.

1. Change from the operating level to the code level by pressing PRG.

2. Select a code with ▲ or ▼ .

3. Change to parameter set PAR1 by pressing SH.

- If necessary, press SH again to change to parameter set PAR 2.

4. If PAR1 or PAR2 is blinking, change the parameter with ▲ or ▼ .

- This is also possible during operation of the drive.

5. Press SH + PRG.

- STO is displayed for approx. 1 s.

- The program jumps back to the code level.

- The controller now works with the new parameter.

6. Change to the operating level by pressing PRG.

The changed parameter is now stored permanently.

7-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Acceptance acknowledged with SH + PRG when the controller is inhibited.

(Labelled with ”[Cxxx]” in the code table.)

The controller only accepts the changed parameter when the controller is inhibited and after pressing SH + PRG.

1. In the operating level you inhibit the controller by pressing STP.

2. Change from the operating level to the code level by pressing PRG.

3. Select a code with ▲ or ▼ .

4. Change to parameter set PAR1 by pressing SH.

- If necessary, press SH again to change to parameter set PAR 2.

5. If PAR1 or PAR2 is blinking, change the parameter with ▲ or ▼ .

6. Press SH + PRG.

- STO is displayed for approx. 1 s.

- The program jumps back to the code level.

7. Change to the operating level by pressing PRG.

- The changed parameter is now stored permanently.

8. Enable the controller again using RUN.

- The controller now works with the new parameter.

Note!

Fast loading of the factory setting for 820X:

Press the keys ▲ and ▼ at the same time in the parameter level to load the factory setting of the selected code.

8200SHB0199

7-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.3.2

Change and store parameters with fieldbus modules.

RS232/485 fieldbus module 2102IB

-

Parameter setting via the serial LECOM interface is supported by the PC programs ”Global Drive Control” and ”LEMOC2” (see Accessories).

-

The codes of parameters set PAR 1 are set via the LECOM interface by entering the code number as address. To address the codes of parameter set PAR 2 it is necessary to add 2000 to the code number.

- Example: Address of minimum field frequency f dmin

:

In the parameter set PAR1: C011.

INTERBUS fieldbus module 2111IB

The parameter setting for controller with INTERBUS is described in the Operating

Instructions for the 2111IB fieldbus module.

System bus module 2171IB/2172IB

The parameter setting for controllers with the system bus (CAN)is described in the

Operating Instructions for the 2171IB/2172IB system bus module.

7.3.3

Dynamic parameter change

Only “HVAC” controllers

C003 ¤ Save parameter set

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-1-0-

-1-

Data will not be stored on EEPROM; all data will be lost when switching off the mains

Data will be stored on EEPROM; setting when switching on the mains

Info

Function

Selection

Important

Continuous change of parameters is possible via a bus connection module. The EEPROM is not damaged by exceeding the max. permissible number of write accesses.

-

-

C003 = -0-

- Continuous parameter change is not permitted because the data is not stored on EEPROM.

C003 = -1-

- Changed parameters are immediately stored on EEPROM.

C003 = -0- is only valid for C010, C011, C012, C013, C037, C038, C105, C181 and C182.

With C003 -1- the continuous change of parameters is not permitted because the max. permissible write accesses of the EEPROM can be exceeded.

7-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.4

Operating functions

7.4.1

Code

Operating mode

Name

C001 ¤ Operating mode

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via 8201BB or

LECOM

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via LECOM

Setpoint selection via LECOM

Control via LECOM

Parameter setting via LECOM

Info

Function

Important

IMPORTANT

With the selection of the operating mode you determine the control, the setpoint selection and the parameter setting of the drive. This setting should always be made first.

When you select the setpoint via the keypad or the motor-potentiometer function, the setpoint will be saved when switching the mains or interrupting the operation.

When changing the operating mode to ”setpoint selection via keypad” or ”setpoint selection via

LECOM”, the drive might start after enabling the controller.

8200SHB0199

7-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.4.2

Code

Working with parameter sets

Name

[C002]* Parameter set

[C007]* Terminal configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

Function executed

Overwrite PAR1 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR2 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR1 and PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR1 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Transmit PAR1 and PAR2 to the operating module

Overwrite PAR1, PAR2 and the unit-dependent data (C016, C036,

C088, C091) with the data of the operating module.

-1-

-3-

-4-

-6-

-7-

-8-

E4 E3

CW/CCW PAR

E2 E1

JOG1/2/3

CW/CCW PAR DCB JOG1

CW/CCW QSP PAR JOG1

CW/CCW PAR TRIP set JOG1

CW/CCW PAR DCB TRIP set

CW/CCW QSP PAR TRIP set

-12CW/CCW PAR UP DOWN

-15CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR JOG1

-17CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR DCB

-18CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR TRIP set

-24H/Re

-33QSP

PAR UP DOWN

PAR I-OFF D/F

-35JOG1/2/3

-36DCB QSP

PAR

PAR

D/F

D/F

-37JOG1 QSP PAR D/F

-38JOG1 PAR TRIP set D/F

-44UP DOWN PAR

-45CW/CCW QSP PAR

D/F

D/F

-46H/Re

-51DCB

PAR QSP JOG1

PAR I-OFF D/F

Info

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

IMPORTANT

For parameter-set changeover via terminal, the corresponding terminal must be assigned to

PAR in both parameter sets.

7-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function

Selection

Series “HVAC”:

Important

The controllers are equipped with two parameter sets: PAR1 and PAR2. You can switch from one parameter set to the other during operation. If the second parameter set is activated, for instance, additional acceleration and deceleration times or three additional JOG frequencies can be activated.

-

-

Change to PAR2 via the digital input terminal PAR, e.g. terminal E3 if C007 = -1- (see table ”Terminal configuration”).

Overwrite parameter sets with factory setting.

Copy the parameter sets to different controllers of the same type using the keypad:

- 820X “ 820X

- 821X “ 821X

- 822X/824X “ 822X/824X

-

-

Copy the parameter sets to different controller using the keypad.

Overwrite parameter sets with controller-dependent data (C002 = -7-).

-

-

-

The controller works with PAR1 when using the factory setting.

For copying the data from the keypad (C002 = -3-, -4-, -5-):

- Parameters C016, C036, C088, C091, C079 will not be transferred.

Select C002 = -7- to transfer these parameters (only series “HVAC”).

The LCD displays the activated parameter set only in the code level.

- The codes marked with *in the code table are the same for PAR1 and PAR2.

8200SHB0199

7-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.4.3

Change parameter set via DC-bus voltage

Only series “HVAC”

7.4.3.1

AC-motor braking by means of parameter set changeover

IMPORTANT Code

No.

Name

C988* DC-bus voltage threshold for

DC-bus voltage control

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0 0 {1 %} 200 C988 = 0 %

- Parameter set changeover deactivated via DC-bus voltage

Changeover always between PAR1 and PAR2

Parameter set changeover via terminal, bus or PC is not possible if

C988 > 0!

Function

Configuration of the parameter sets

Important

With the parameter set changeover in dependence of the DC-bus voltage, the AC motor braking can be used as alternative for DC braking.

The AC motor braking is a braking method without external brake resistor for the control mode

“V/f-characteristic control with linear characteristic” (C014 = -2-)”.

-

-

With mains voltages up to approx. 3 AC 400 V it is possible to achieve braking times shorter than with the DC-brake.

The braking times for generative braking via external brake resistor are approx. 33 % shorter than for AC motor braking.

Code PAR1 setting

(active in normal operation)

PAR2 setting

(active in braking operation)

C013C

105

C015

C016

Braking time required for AC braking

Value adapted to the drive, e.g. V/f vertex = 50 Hz

Value adapted to the drive, e.g. V min

= 5 %

Deceleration time of the drive with max. inertia load without getting the message OU (overvoltage) during deceleration.

Depending on the drive power up to min. 25 % of the value under C015 in

PAR1:

Rule of thumb: 2.2 kW Õ 50 %

Decrease for lower drive power, increase for higher drive power.

Depending on the drive power up to

500 % of the value under C0016 in

PAR1:

Rule of thumb: 2.2 kW Õ factor 3

For lower drive power increase the factor, for higher power decrease it.

C988 Threshold

Setting according to the mains voltage:

400 V Õ 112 %

440 V Õ 123 %

460 V Õ 129 %

480 V Õ 133 %

Note

C0013 for braking along the main setpoint ramp

C0105 for braking along the QSP ramp

Thus the energy in the motor is decreased by overexcitation in PAR2.

Thus also in the lower speed range, the energy in the motor is decreased by overexcitation in PAR2.

-

-

-

-

AC motor braking can only be used together with the control mode “V/f-characteristic control with linear characteristic” (C014 = -2-).

Parameter set changeover is not possible via terminal, bus or PC, if C988 > 0!

The higher the mains voltage, the longer the deceleration time for AC braking must be set in

PAR1, to fulfill the requirements stated above. It is therefore possible to achieve shorter deceleration times with the DCB, if the mains voltage is high.

C988 is the same in all parameter sets.

7-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.4.3.2

Automatic parameter set changeover for controlled deceleration in the event of mains failure

IMPORTANT Code

No.

Name

C988* DC-bus voltage threshold for

DC-bus voltage control

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0 0 {1 %} 200 C988 = 0 %

- Parameter set changeover deactivated via DC-bus voltage

Changeover always between PAR1 and PAR2

Parameter set changeover is not possible via terminal, bus or PC if

C988 > 0!

Function -

-

Controlled deceleration of the motor to standstill (f d event of mains failure.

= 0) when switching the mains or in the

If the motor is not standing still when being reconnected to the mains, it is accelerated along the acceleration ramp (C0012) to the preselected setpoint. There is no delay time as it occurs with active flying-restart circuit.

The function can be used with or without external brake resistor:

Without external brake resistor Controlled deceleration of the motor to standstill (f d

-

= 0) when the controller is active.

The braking energy is generated through the system losses (controller and motor).

With external brake resistor -

-

Automatic, fast deceleration of the motor to standstill (f d

= 0).

The deceleration time is shorter than without external brake resistor.

Functionality 1.Mains voltage is interrupted.

2.U

G becomes lower than the value in C0988

PAR1 is activated.

3.QSP in PAR1 starts operation in generator mode.

4.U

G becomes higher than the value in C0988.

5.PAR2 is activated

The motor accelerates with T ir

(C012 in PAR2).

6.The rotation energy in the motor keeps U

G at its min. value until the motor speed is approx. 0.

8200SHB0199

7-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Adjustment

Threshold

Terminal configuration

Without QSP

In normal operation

Quick stop without external brake resistor

Quick stop with external brake resistor

With QSP

In normal operation

Important

Code PAR1 setting PAR2 setting

(active in the event of mains failure)

C988 Threshold

(active in normal operation)

C0988 = 100 % corresponds exactly to the mains voltage 3

AC 400 V.

Adapt C0988 to the mains-voltage dependent undervoltage:

3 AC 400 V - 10 %

Õ C0988 = 75 % ... 85 %

C007 Select terminal configuration with terminal for QSP function.

3 AC 460 V - 10 %

Õ C0988 = 75 % ... 98 %

Select terminal configuration for normal operation.

Invert QSP input via C114.

The QSP input selected in

PAR1 must only be used if not inverted.

Do not assign the QSP input.

Invert the QSP input selected in PAR1 via C114.

Set the deceleration time for

QSP required for the application.

C105 Ensure with the setting that the motor decelerates to standstill in a controlled way after mains disconnection:

1.Set the same value as in

PAR2.

2.Switch off the mains voltage.

-

-

PAR1 will be activated.

Observe whether the controller indicates

“Overvoltage OU” during controlled deceleration.

3.Reduce the value and switch the mains until the controller indicates OU during deceleration.

4.Increase this value by approx. 20 % as final setting.

C105 1.Set the same value as in

PAR2.

2.Reduce the value until the required deceleration time after mains switch-off is available.

Set the deceleration time for

QSP required for the application.

Note

Most uniform deceleration can be achieved by setting the upper limit of the

With factory setting, the

QSP input is low active.

Do not exceed the generative current limit during deceleration.

Select the external brake resistor large enough.

-

-

Parameter set changeover via terminal, bus or PC is not possible, if C988 > 0!

C988 is not the same in all parameter sets.

7-14

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5

Control functions

7.5.1

Speed range (f dmin, f dmax)

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C010 Minimum field frequency

820X 0.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

0.00

0.00

C011 Maximum field frequency

820X 50.00

30.00

821X/822X/

824X

50.00

7.50

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

Function

Adjustment

Important

Special features

820X

821X/822X/824X

480.00

480.00

480.00

480.00

Info

IMPORTANT

The speed range required for the application can be selected via the input of field frequencies f dmin and f dmax

:

f dmin corresponds to the speed at 0 % speed setpoint selection.

f dmax corresponds to the speed at 100 % speed setpoint selection.

Relation between field frequency and synchronous motor speed: n

Nsyn f dmax p

ô 60 f n p

Nsyn dmax

Synchronous motor speed [min

Max. field frequency [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

-1 ]

Example: 4 pole asynchronous motor: p = 2, f dmax

= 50 Hz n

Nsyn

50 ô

2

60

1500 min 1

-

-

-

With the setting f dmin

> f dmax the field frequency is limited to f dmax

.

With setpoint selection via JOG values, f dmax acts as limitation.

f dmax is an internal normalisation variable:

- Use the LECOM interface only for important modifications, when the controller is inhibited.

-

-

Observe the maximum speed of the motor!

f dmin is only effective:

- With analog setpoint input.

- With the motor potentiometer function ”DOWN”.

With field frequencies f d

> 240 Hz:

- The overcurrent switch-off can be activated.

With field frequencies f d

> 300 Hz:

- Avoid chopper frequencies < 8 kHz.

The display value of f dmin

C501.

and f dmax can be related to an application datum using C500 and

C011

(fdmax) fd

C010

(fdmin)

0 % 100 %

8200SHB0199

7-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.2

Acceleration and deceleration times T ir

, T if

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C012 Acceleration time T ir

820X 5.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

5.00

0.00

0.00

C013 Deceleration time T if

820X 5.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

5.00

0.00

0.00

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

999.00

999.00

999.00

999.00

Info

1300.00 HVAC only

1300.00 HVAC only

Function

Adjustment

IMPORTANT

The acceleration and deceleration times determine the controller response after a setpoint change.

The acceleration and deceleration times refer to a change of the field frequency from 0 Hz to the max. field frequency set under C011.

Calculate the times T ir

- t ir and t if and T if

, which must be set under C012 and C013.

are the times desired for the change between f d1 and f d2

:

Important

7

LU

W

LU

ô

I

G

I

GPD[

I

G

7

LI

W

LI

ô

I

G

I

GPD[

I

G

Under unfavourable operating conditions, too short acceleration and deceleration times can lead to the deactivation of the controller with the indication of TRIP OC5. In these cases, the acceleration and deceleration times should be short enough that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching I max of the controller.

Special features

820X The slope is adjustable between 0.095 Hz/s and 780 Hz/s.

f f dmax d2 fd1

0 tir

T ir tif

T if t

7-16

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.3

Current limit values (I max limit values)

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C022 I max limit

(motor mode)

150 30

C023 I max limit

(generator mode)

80 30

822X/824X 80 30

{1 %}

{1 %}

{1 %}

150

Info

110

150 as of software

1.6 and HVAC

IMPORTANT

Function

Series “HVAC”:

Adjustment

Controller behaviour when reaching the limit value

The controllers are equipped with a current-limit control which determines the dynamic response under load. The measured load is compared with the limit values set under C022 for motor load and under C023 for generator load. If the current limits are exceeded, the controller changes its dynamic behaviour.

C023 = 30 %

- Current limit controller for generator mode not active (only for applications with special machines running at high field frequencies at the same time).

-

- Only possible with control mode V/f-characteristic control (C014 = -2-) (see chapter 7.5.5).

C023 = 30 % or C023 = 149 %

- Earth-fault detection not active.

Set the acceleration and deceleration times so that the drive can follow the speed profile without reaching I max

.

During acceleration:

- Increase of the acceleration ramp

During deceleration:

- Increase of the deceleration ramp

With increasing load and constant speed:

- When reaching the motor-current limit value:

Decrease of the field frequency to

10 Hz at 820X

0 Hz at 821X/822X/824X.

- When reaching the generator-current limit value:

Increase of the field frequency to the max. frequency (C011).

- Stop the field-frequency change if the load falls below the limit value.

Important

821X/822X/824X A correct current control in the generator mode is possible only with a connected brake unit or in the DC-bus connection with energy exchange.

For operation with chopper frequencies > 8 kHz, the current limit values should be set to the currents ”I max for 60 s” indicated in the rated data (see chapter 3.4).

(Derating at higher chopper frequencies)

8200SHB0199

7-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.4

Current limitation controller (I max controller)

Code

Only “HVAC” controllers

Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0.25

0.00

C077* Gain (V

P

)

I max controller

C078* Integral action time

(T i

)

I max controller

65 12

{0.01}

{1 ms}

1.00

Info

9990

Function

IMPORTANT

For power control, the I max controller can be adjusted under C077 and C078.

The following values for V

P and T i are internally set if C077 and C078 are factory set:

Setting for Control mode

C014 = -2-, -3-

C014 = -4-

*

I max controller works internally with

V

P

0.25

0.5

*

Internally converted with a factor

T i

65 ms

87 ms *

C077

0.25

0.25

C078

65 ms

65 ms

Adjustment

Important

-

-

The I max controller is factory set to stability.

For power control of extreme masses set the following:

C014 = -2- or C014 = -3- (characteristic control)

V

P and T i are to be rated as follows:

- C077 = 0.06

- C078 = 750 ms

C077 and C078 are only stored in parameter set 1.

7-18

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.5

Code

Control mode

Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C014 ¤ Control mode

820X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

821X/822X/

824X

-4-4-

Linear characteristic V f d auto boost with

Square characteristic V f d

2 auto boost with

Linear characteristic V f d constant V min boost with constant V min boost

Square characteristic V f d

2 with

Motor-current control

Info

Function

820X

IMPORTANT

-

-

Under C014 you can set the control mode and the voltage characteristic. It is also possible to adapt your drive to different load characteristics:

Linear characteristic for drives with constantly increasing load torques in relation to the speed

Square-law characteristics for drives with a load torque squared in relation to the speed

Square-law V/f characteristics are mainly used for centrifugal pump and fan drives. It is however necessary to check whether your individual pump or fan application can be driven with this control mode.

If your pump or fan drive cannot be operated with a square-law V/f characteristic, you should select the control mode C014 = -0-, -2- or -4-.

V/f-characteristic control with auto boost

The control mode mentioned above enables low-loss operation of stand-alone drives with three-phase AC standard asynchronous motors with load dependent V min boost.

C014 = -0-

Linear characteristic

C014 = -1-

Square characteristic

(e.g. for pumps, fans)

V o u t

1 0 0 %

V o u t

1 0 0 %

V m i n

A u t o b o o s t f d r f d

V m i n

A u t o b o o s t f d r f d

8200SHB0199

7-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

820X

821X

822X

824X

821X

822X

824X

-

-

V/f-characteristic control with V min

boost

Select the classical V/f-control with constant V min boost to operate the following drives:

Multi-motor applications (several motors connected to one controller)

Three-phase AC reluctance motors

Three-phase sliding rotor motors

-

-

-

Operation with special motors with assigned frequency-voltage characteristic

Positioning and infeed drives with high dynamic response

Hoists

C014 = -2-

Linear characteristic

C014 = -3-

Square characteristic

(e.g. for pumps, fans)

V o u t

1 0 0 %

V o u t

1 0 0 % m i n m i n f d f d r f d f d r

Motor-current control

-

-

-

Compared with the V/f-characteristic control the motor-current control offers considerably higher torque and reduced current consumption during idle running. Select the motor-current control for operation with the following drives:

Single drives with extremely variable loads

Single drives with heavy start conditions

Multi-motor applications with the same motors and the same load distribution

Sensorless speed control of standard three-phase AC motors together with slip compensation

(C021)

7-20

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Adjustment

Important

Special features

821X/822X/824X

C014 = -0- or C014 = -1-:

1.Select V/f-rated frequency C015

2.Select V min boost C016

C014 = -2- or C014 = -3-:

1.Select V/f-rated frequency C015

2.Select V min boost (C016)

C014 = -4-

Drives with matching four-pole standard motors need not be adapted. The data are save in the factory setting. After having started the drive, the controller itself detects all further motor data.

Drives with non matching motors must be optimised. Non-matching motors have the following features.

- Rated motor power > 1.4

k rated inverter power

- Rated motor power < 0.6

k rated inverter power

- Operation with 2, 6, 8, 10 and 12-pole standard motors

- Operation with special motors

The drive can be optimised by entering motor data under C088/C091.

The control mode C014 = -4- should only be used with the slip compensation. The ”sensorless speed control” is thus optimised for the process.

The idle current of the motor (magnetising current) must not exceed the rated current of the controller.

The power code of the connected motor should not be more the two classes lower than the one of the motor assigned to the controller.

The change from V/f-characteristic control to motor-current control should only be carried out when the controller is inhibited.

Control mode motor-current control C014 = -4-

Motor-current control (factory setting) is not possible if

- drives with different loads are connected to an inverter,

- drives with different rated powers are connected to an inverter,

-

- you use motor chokes, motor filters, sine filters or sine-interference suppression filters.

With very small friction values, a phase offset of up to 180 • occurs at the motor shaft when enabling the controller.

Control mode square characteristic V f d

2

-

(C014 = -3-)

High inertias result in a reduced acceleration of the drive.

- This behaviour can be avoided by changing the parameter sets (e.g. acceleration with

C014 = -2-).

8200SHB0199

7-21

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.6

V/f characteristic

7.5.6.1

V/f-rated frequency f dr

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

820X 50.00

30.00

821X/822X/

824X

50.00

7.50

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

960.00

960.00

Info

IMPORTANT

Function when

C014 = -0-, -1-, -2-, -3-

Adjustment

The V/f-rated frequency determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable influence on the current, torque and power performance of the motor.

Calculate the frequency to be set under C015

820X:

C015 [Hz]

V

230 V rmotor

[V]

ô rated motor frequency [Hz]

821X/822X/824X:

C015 [Hz]

V

400 V rmotor

[V]

ô rated motor frequency [Hz]

C014 = -2-

Linear characteristic o u t r m o t o r

C014 = -3-

Square characteristic

(e.g. for pumps, fans) o u t r m o t o r

Important m i n m i n

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r

C 0 1 5 d r m o t o r K 3 5 . 0 0 6 6 G B

An internal mains voltage compensation compensates deviation in the mains during operation.

Therefore, they do not have to be considered for the setting of C015.

7-22

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function when C014 = -4The V/f-rated frequency influences the internal parameters of the motor model when using the control mode ”motor current control”.

Adjustment Setting of C015

50 Hz

52.6 Hz

50 Hz

50 Hz

87 Hz

90.9 Hz

D

D

Motor connection Motor voltage

Y

Y

Y

D

230/400 V

220/380 V

280/480 V

400/690 V

400 V D

230/400 V

280/480 V

220/380 V

Rated motor frequency

50 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

50 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

Note!

4-pole asynchronous motors, which are designed fro a rated frequency of

50 Hz at 230 V in star connection, can be operated in delta connection when being constantly excited up to 87 Hz at 400 V.

- The motor current and the motor power are then increased by the factor

»

3 = 1.73.

- The field weakening range begins above 87 Hz.

-

Advantages:

- Higher speed-setting range

- 73 % higher power efficiency with standard motors.

- Improved motor cooling in the lower speed range with self-ventilated motors.

-

In principle, this method can also be used with higher-pole motors (6, 8, ...).

- Observe the mechanical speed limit when using 2-pole asynchronous motors.

8200SHB0199

7-23

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.6.2

V min setting

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C016 min setting

820X

821X/822X/

824X

* 0.00

0.00

0.00

Function when

C014 = -0-, -1-

Adjustment

{0.05 %}

{0.02 %}

40.00

40.00

Info

IMPORTANT

*depends on the unit

Load-dependent boost of the motor voltage in the field frequency range below the V/f-rated frequency. C016 acts as gain factor of the auto-boost function (only with 820xE).

As known from experience, an adjustment is not required when having the conditions mentioned above.

An optimisation can be advantageous for drives with very high starting torques:

1.Operate motor under load.

2.Select the frequency setpoint.

3.Increase V min until the required motor current (torque) occurs.

- If the setting of V min

”overcurrent” (OCx).

is too high, a positive-feedback effect can occur and activate the TRIP for drives with square load torques (fans, pumps):

1.Operate motor under load.

2.Select the frequency setpoint.

3.Adapt V min until the drive runs steadily and smoothly over the whole frequency range.

- If the setting of V min is too high, the TRIP ”overcurrent” (OCx) can be activated and lead to an excessive motor temperature.

for drives with special motors:

1.Operate motor under load.

2.Select the frequency setpoint.

3.Increase V min until the required motor current (torque) occurs.

- If the setting of V min

”overcurrent” (OCx).

is too high, a positive-feedback effect can occur and activate the TRIP

4.Check the current consumption during idle running when no load is applied.

7-24

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function when

C014 = -2-, -3-

Adjustment

Slip-frequency calculation

Important

Load-independent boost of the motor voltage in the field frequency range below the V/f-rated frequency. Thus, the torque performance of the inverter drive can be optimised.

It is absolutely necessary to adapt C016 to the asynchronous motor used. Otherwise, the motor might be destroyed by overtemperature or the inverter might be driven with overcurrent.

: 1.Operate the motor in idle running with a slip frequency of f d

- P mot

$ 7.5 kW: f d

5 Hz

- P mot

7.5 kW: f d

2 Hz f s n

Nsyn f dr

ô n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r f dr

ô 60 p f s f dr n

Nsyn n r p

Slip frequency

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

Synchronous motor speed [min -1 ]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1 ]

Number of pole pairs

2.Increase V min until the following motor current is reached:

- Motor in short-term operation at 0 Hz ˆ f d

Self-ventilated motors:

Forced-ventilated motors: I

I motor motor

ˆ I

ˆ 25 Hz: r motor

ˆ I r motor

- Motor in continuous operation at 0 Hz ˆ f d

Self-ventilated motors:

Forced-ventilated motors:

I motor

I motor

ˆ

ˆ I

ˆ

0.8

25 Hz: k r motor

I r motor

The change from V/f-characteristic control to motor-current control should only be carried out when the controller is inhibited.

Observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous motor at low field frequencies when adjusting it:

-

-

Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be driven for a short time with rated frequency within the frequency range 0 Hz ˆ f d

ˆ 25 Hz.

Contact the manufacturer for exact setting values for the max. permissible motor current in the lower frequency range of self-ventilated motors.

Function when C014 = -4V min is not effective when using the control mode ”motor current control”.

8200SHB0199

7-25

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.7

C005 ¤ Configuration

Function

Configuration

Only “HVAC” controllers

Special features

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-6-

-7-

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8 with setpoint summation via frequency input E1

Operation with open-loop control via frequency input E1 with setpoint summation via terminal 8

Open-loop operation via frequency input E1 with apparent current limitation via terminal 8

Operation with closed-loop control; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

Closed-loop operation; setpoint via frequency input E1 with analog feedback via terminal 8

Info

C005 = -3possible with

C014 = -2-, -4-

If C005 = -0-

2 ms cycle time

If C005 = -1- ... -7-

4 ms cycle time

The signal flow in the controller can be changed under C005. The functionality of the controller will be changed when changing C005. The signal-flow charts in chapter 16.3 show the structure for each configuration.

The selection C005 = -4-, -5- cannot be used.

7-26

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.8

Motor data detection

820X setting range: Function not available.

Setting range 821X/822X/824X:

Code Name Possible settings

C088 Rated motor current

821X/822X/824X

C091 Motor cos j

821X/822X/824X

Lenze Choice

*

0.0 ... 1.2

k rated output current

0.0 ... 2.0

k rated output current

*

0.4

{0.1} 1.0

Info

HVAC only

Function

Adjustment

Important

IMPORTANT

*depends on the unit

*depends on the unit

Is used to adapt not matching motors, special motors, etc.

Enter the rated currrent and cos j of your motor.

-

-

The motor data detection is only effective with the control mode C014 = -4-.

Drives with matching 4 pole standard motors 230/400 V in star connection do not need to be adapted. After having started the drive, the controller itself detects all further motor data.

The following drives can be optimised by entering the nameplate data ”rated motor current” and

”cos j ” under C088 or C091:

- Motor, one power class smaller than the motor assigned to the controller.

- Motor, one or two power classes smaller than the motor assigned to the controller.

- Drives with 2, 6, 8, 10 and 12 pole standard motors.

- Drives with special motors.

8200SHB0199

7-27

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.9

Running optimisation

7.5.9.1

Slip compensation

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

Function

820X 0.0

0.0

821X/822X/

824X

0.0

0.0

0.0

{0.1 %}

{0.1 %}

{0.1 %}

12.0

50.0

20.0

Info

IMPORTANT

* With C014 = -2-,

-3-, controller dependent

*With C014 = -4-

Under load, the speed of an asynchronous machine is reduced. This load-dependent speed reduction is called slip. The slip can be partly compensated by setting C021 accordingly. The slip compensation is effective with all control modes (C014).

C021 < 0 (with C014 = -2-, -3-)

- “Smoother” drive characteristic, if strong load shock occur or application of several motors.

In the field frequency range between 5 Hz ... 50 Hz (87 Hz), the deviation of the rated speed is

$ 1 % (guide value). In field-weakening operation, the fault increases.

s

1.Rough setting of the slip constants (C021) by using the motor data: n

Nsyn n

Nsyn n r

ô 100 % n

Nsyn f dr

ô 60 p s n

Nsyn n r f dr p

Slip constant (C021) [%]

Synchronous motor speed [min -1

]

Rated frequency to motor nameplate [Hz]

No. of pole pairs (1, 2, 3, ...)

]

Rated speed to motor nameplate [min -1

Important

2.Empirical precise setting of the slip compensation:

- Correct C021 until no load-dependent speed drop occurs in the required speed range between idle running and max. motor load.

3.Example:

- Motor data: 4 kW / 1435 min -1 / 50 Hz n

Nsyn

50 Hz ô 60

2

1500 min

1 s

1500 min

1

1435 min

1500 min 1

1

ô 100 % 4.33 %

Preset C021 = 4.33 %

If C021 is set too high, overcompensation can occur and lead to an instability of the drive.

7-28

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.9.2

Chopper frequency

820X setting range: Fixed chopper frequency up to 9.2 kHz.

Automatic lowering of the chopper frequency is not possible.

Setting range 821X/822X/824X:

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C018 ¤ Chopper frequency

821X/822X/824X -1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

C144 ¤ Chopper-frequency reduction

821X/822X/824X -1-0-

-1-

4 kHz

8 kHz

12 kHz

16 kHz

12 kHz reduced noise emission

16 kHz reduced noise emission

4 kHz reduced noise emission

8 kHz reduced noise emission

12 kHz reduced noise emission

16 kHz reduced noise emission

No chopper-frequency lowering

Automatic chopper-frequency at

J max

- 10 • C

Info

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

IMPORTANT

Function C018

Important

With this function, you set the chopper frequency of the inverter. With factory setting, the chopper frequency (C018) is set to 8 kHz. Reasons for other parameter settings may be:

< 8 kHz:

- Improved running performance with smaller field frequencies

> 8 kHz:

- Reduced noise emission in the connected motor

- Good sine wave of the motor current for applications with field frequencies > 150 Hz, e.g.

middle frequency drives (C018 = -4- or -5-)

With chopper frequencies > 8 kHz, the unit suffers high power losses, which must be compensated by derating the output current. Please observe the indications in chapter 3.4 and the corresponding parameter setting of the current limit under C022/C023 to ”I max

for 60 s”.

Filters and chokes in the motor cable must meet the requirements of chopper frequency (e.g. sine interference suppression filter, if C018 = -5-). Please observe the notes of the manufacturers.

8200SHB0199

7-29

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function C144

Important

C144 = -0-

- With chopper frequencies of 12 kHz or 16 kHz and if the max. permissible heat sink temperature is exceeded ( J max

) because of higher losses, the inverter will be inhibited, TRIP will be indicated and the motors idles.

C144 = -1- (automatic chopper frequency derating):

- With chopper frequencies of 12 kHz or 16 kHz, the inverter reduces the chopper frequency automatically to 8 kHz and thus ensures operation, if a heat-sink temperature of J max

-10 • C is exceeded.

- After the heat sink has cooled down, the chopper frequency is automatically increased again.

The automatic chopper frequency reduction leads to a higher noise generation compared to the operation with 12 kHz or 16 kHz.

The current limitation C022/C023 is not automatically influenced by the selected chopper frequency.

For 822X/824X only if C144 = -1-

- With chopper frequencies of 8 kHz, 12 kHz or 16 kHz, the controller reduces the chopper frequency automatically to 4 kHz, if the maximum current is exceeded.

7-30

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.9.3

Oscillation damping

Setting range 820X/821X: Function not available.

Setting range 822X/824X:

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

C079 Oscillation damping

822X/824X 5 0 {1} 80

Function

Adjustment

Important

IMPORTANT

Is not transferred when operating module.

Suppression of idling oscillations when:

a drive does not match, i.e. rated controller power - motor e.g. operation with high chopper frequency and the related power derating,

-

-

operation of higher-pole motors, operation of special motors, having a resonance phenomenon in the drive set.

1.Approach the area with speed oscillations.

2.Reduce the oscillation by changing C079 step by step.

- Indicators for smooth running can be a uniform motor current or the reduction of the mechanical vibrations in the bearing seat.

-

-

Parameter transfer from C079 not possible via keypad.

Compensate the resonances in speed controlled operation via the parameters of the controller.

8200SHB0199

7-31

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.9.4

Ramp function generator S-shape

Only “HVAC” controllers

Code Name

C182* Integration time ramp function generator S-shape

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0.00

0.00

Function

Adjustment

Important

{0.01 s} 50.00

Info

IMPORTANT

An adjustable transmission element (PT1) is connected behind the ramp function generator. The integration time (T i

) is set. It rounds the frequency setpoint.

This function enables absolutely smooth starting of the drive.

C182 = 0.00

-

- The ramp function generator work linearly.

C182 > 0.00

- The ramp function generator works as S-shape with the time T i

= C182.

C182 is only stored in parameter set 1.

7-32

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.9.5

Skip frequencies

Only “HVAC” controllers

Code Name

C625* Skip frequency 1

C626* Skip frequency 2

C627* Skip frequency 3

C628 Bandwidth of skip frequencies

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

480.00 0.00

480.00 0.00

480.00 0.00

0.00

0.00

Function

Adjustment

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.01 %}

480.00

480.00

480.00

100.00

Info

IMPORTANT

With certain output frequencies, mechanical resonances might occur in the drive (e.g. fan). The skip frequencies eliminate these unwanted output frequencies. The bandwidth ( a f) determines the range of skip frequencies.

With skip frequency = 480.00 Hz, the function is not active.

The function is within the frequency setpoint range of the ramp function generator.

-

-

Set the required skip frequencies under C625, C626, C627.

C628 defines the bandwidth of skip frequencies.

- Calculate the bandwidth ( D f) for the corresponding skip frequency:

Important o f [Hz] Skip frequency [Hz] ô

C628 [%]

100 %

-

-

The skip frequencies are only effective in the main setpoint channel (see signal flow chart).

C625, C626, C627, C628 are only stored in parameter set 1.

fd set2

FIG 7-3

C625 f skip1

C628 f

C626 f skip3

C628 f

C627 f skip2

C628 f

Skip frequencies and their bandwidth ( a f) fd set1

8200SHB0199

7-33

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.10

PID controller as process controller

Only “HVAC” controllers

C070 Gain

PID controller

C071 Integral action time

PID controller

C072 Differential component

PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

1.00

0.00

100

0.0

0.0

10

0.0

0.0

Function

{0.01}

{0.1}

{0.1 %}

300.00

100.0

Info

9999 See table under

“Adjustment”

5.0

0.0 = P-component not active

9999 = I-component not active

0.0 = D-component not active ref. to C011 (f dmax

The process controller is active with the following configuration:

Configuration Terminal function

C005 = -6-

C005 = -7-

Setpoint via terminal 8 (JOG value, motor potentiometer, fieldbus)

Actual value via terminal E1

Setpoint via terminal E1 (JOG value, motor potentiometer, fieldbus)

Actual value via terminal 8

)

Setpoints Setpoints can be selected and displayed under the following codes:

Code

C037

C038

C039

C046

C181

Setpoint selection and display

JOG value1 [Hz]

JOG value2 [Hz]

JOG value3 [Hz]

Frequency setpoint [Hz]

(Only with keypad 8201BB or interface)

Setpoint PID controller [Hz]

Actual value The actual value can be displayed under the following codes:

Code

C051

Actual value display

Actual value PID controller [Hz]

A digital frequency can be selected as actual value via terminal E1 (see chapter 4.2.8.3).

7-34

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Normalisation

Configuration

Adaptation of a field related parameter to an application datum to be controlled (e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate, humidity, speed) under C500 and C501.

The following codes are normalised at the same time:

- C010, C011 C017, C019, C037, C038, C039, C046, C049, C050, C051, C181, C625, C626,

C627

After a normalisation, the output frequency [Hz] (C050) can only be recalculated with the display factors C500 and C501 (see formulas in chapter 7.6.3).

In factory setting, all field related parameters refer to the frequency. Input and display in Hz. The values of C037, C038, C039, C046, C051, C181 refer to C011.

Factory setting

A percentage of the input or display values corresponds to the frequency in Hz.

C011

[Hz]

Adjustment

Guide values for pressure control and flow rate

0 % 100 % Setpoint or act. value

The value set under C071 correspond to the following integral action times T n

.

Values under C071 Integral action time T n

10 ... 5000 10 ms ... 5000 ms

5000 ... 6000

6000 ... 7000

5 s ... 10 s

10 s ... 100 s

7000 ... 8000

8000 ... 9999

100 s ... 1000 s

1000 s ... 9999 s

The values in the following table are for guidance for pressure and flow-rate controls. A fine adjustment is therefore always necessary.

-

-

C070, C071 and C072 must be set so that the target value is reached quickly and with minimum overshooting when the setpoints and actual values are changed.

The differential component K

D

(set C072 = 0).

(C072) is usually not required for pressure and flow-rate controls

Guide values for pressure control and flow rate

Code Gases

C070 (V

P

)

C071

(T n

)

0.1

5000

(5 s)

Liquids

0.02 ... 0.1

200 ... 1000

(0.2 s ... 1 s)

8200SHB0199

7-35

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Influence PID controller

-

-

-

-

When using a process control with frequency precontrol (C238 = -1-), the control factor is very important.

The control factors is calculated from the difference of the values under C050 and C051.

The control factor determines the influence C074 of the PID controller.

The influence (C074) refers to f dmax

(C011).

C074 influences the stability of the control circuit. It should be set to a value as low as possible.

The influence C074 [%] is calculated as follows:

Influence [%]

C050 C051

C011

ô 100 %

Example

The influence is to be calculated for the following values:

C011 = 50 Hz, C050 = 53 Hz, C051 = 50 Hz

6 %

53 Hz 50 Hz

50 Hz

ô 100 %

Set the influence so that the output of the process controller covers the calculated value in every operating point.

- For this example (influence = 6 %) set for instance C074 = 10 %. This is a guide value and includes tolerances which must always be considered.

If the influence (C074) is too high, the control circuit may become instable.

Additive influence of the process controller

-

-

Conditions:

C051 = Positive actual value

C181 = Select positive setpoint

C238 = -1- (with frequency precontrol)

Potentiometer connections of the dancer

- End (E) = + 10 V

- Beginning (A) = GND

The direction of control action of the process controller output is added to the main setpoint.

Example of a dancer control with additive influence of the process controller

V1 V2

Function:

1.The dancer deflects to the bottom.

(V

T decreases)

2.V2 increases.

+10 V E

S

A

0 V ... 10 V

~ V1

V

T

M

3~

3

82XX V20

7-36

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Subtractive influence of the process controller

-

-

-

-

Conditions:

C051 = Positive actual value

C181 = Select positive setpoint

C238 = -1- (with frequency precontrol)

Potentiometer connections of the dancer

- Beginning (A) = + 10 V

- End (E) = GND

The direction of control action of the process controller is substracted from the main setpoint.

Example of a dancer control with subtractive influence of the process controller

V1 V2

Function:

1.The dancer deflects to the bottom.

(V

T increases)

2.V1 decreases.

Important

M

3~

3

82XX V20

V

T

S

A

E +10 V

0 V ... 10 V

~ V2

-

-

-

-

Caution

The direction of rotation must not be changed, if the process controller is used as speed controller.

If C070 = 0.0, the proportional component K

P

If C071 = 9999, the integral component K

I is not active.

is not active.

If C072 = 0.0, the differential component K

D is not active.

The process controller is not suitable for inverse process control.

(Inverse control means that the speed becomes lower, if the actual value is lower than the setpoint.)

Inverse controls are for instance, vacuum pressure control or humidity controls. Here, the 93XX

VECTOR should be used.

8200SHB0199

7-37

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.10.1 Reset integral component and influence

Function

-

-

The following functions are possible:

Reset the integral component K

I of the PID controller via terminal.

Set the influence of the PID controller to 0.

Activation C007 = -28- ... -34-, -48-, -50-, -51-:

HIGH level at terminal E2

- Reset of K

I

C007 = -48-, -49-, -50-:

HIGH level at terminal E4

- Reset influence

The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1)

7.5.10.2 Setpoint selection for the process controller

C181* Setpoint PID controller

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0.00

-480.00

{0.02 Hz} 480.00

Info

Function

Adjustment

Important

Special features

-

-

Selection of a frequency setpoint, e.g. for the dancer position for a dancer control in a line drive, the pressure setpoint in a pressure control.

C181 = 0

The setpoint of the PID controller is

- selected externally (terminal 8 or E1),

- set via the keys ( ▲ , ▼ ) of the operating module 8201BB.

C181 0

Setpoint selection for the PID controller via this code.

-

-

The setpoint selection via this code is only active, if C181 0.

C181 is only stored in parameter set 1.

The setpoint can also be entered as application datum (C500, C501) (see chapter 7.6.3).

7-38

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.10.3 Frequency precontrol

C238 ¤ Frequency precontrol

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-1-0-

-1-

No precontrol

With setpoint precontrol

Function

Info

C238 = -1-

The process controller has only limited influence on the process.

The following setpoint precontrol is possible:

A The setpoint of the process controller is derived from the precontrol value (C181 = 0).

- Applications with frequency precontrol are e.g. speed controls.

B The setpoint of the process controller is selected under C181 (C181 0).

- Applications are e.g. dancer controls, pressure and flow-rate controls

7.5.10.4 Frequency setting range

C239 ¤ Frequency setting range

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

Bipolar

Unipolar

Function

Important

Info

C239 = -0-

Allows both directions of rotations for the control process.

C239 = -1-

Allows only one direction of rotation for the control process.

-

-

Application with frequency setting range are, for instance:

Fan controls

Dancer controls

Only if C005 > -0-, C239 has an influence.

8200SHB0199

7-39

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11

Setpoint input

7.5.11.1 Analog setpoint input

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0.00

-10.00

C026 Offset adjustment analog input

C027 Scaling factor of analog input

C034 ¤ Master current

100.0

-200.0

-0-0-

-1-

{0.01 V}

{0.1 %}

0 mA ... 20 mA /

0 V ... 5 V / 0 V ... 10 V

4 mA ... 20 mA

Info

10.00 HVAC only

200.0 HVAC only

Function

Not effective with

C005 = -0-

Not effective with

C005 = -0-

-

-

An analog setpoint signal can be selected via terminal 8.

You can select different setpoint ranges by reconnection of the jumper at the front of the controller.

Inverse setpoint input because of negative terminal adjustment.

Offset adjustment of the analog channel (only series “HVAC”)

Adjustment Setpoint range

0 mA ... 20 mA / 4 mA ... 20 mA

0 V ... 5 V

0 V ... 10 V

Jumper position

5 - 6

3 - 4

1 - 2 (Factory setting)

Important

To select the setpoint by means of the master current, you change the ranges under C034:

C034 = -00 mA ... 20 mA

C034 = -14 mA ... 20 mA

With an internal reference voltage of 5 V:

- Plug in the jumper at position 3-4

If the setpoint is input by means of a master voltage 0 V ... 5 V / 0 V ... 10 V:

- Set C034 = -0-

Analog setpoint input is not possible with setpoint input via the function ”Motor potentiometer”

(C007 = -10-, -11-, -12-, -13-, -21-).

7-40

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Only series “HVAC”:

Adjustment Scaling factor of the analog channel via C027:

C027 = 0.0 % ... 200.0 %

- Set-value input

C027 = -200.0 % ... -0.1%

- Inverse setpoint input

Offset adjustment of the analog channel via C026:

The adjustment of -10.00 V ... + 10.00 V refers to an input voltage of 10 V.

Calibration when using a

PID controller

Important

Setpoint input

C034 = -0-, C027 > 0 %

Offset adjustment via C026

Inverse setpoint input

C034 = -0-, C027 < 0 %

Offset adjustment via C026 fd fd max

C011

C027 0.0 % ... 200.0 %

200

%

100

%

C027 fd fd max

C011

C027 -200.0 % ... -0.1 %

-200

%

-100

%

C027 fd min

C010 C026

0 %

10 V

5 V

20 mA

Kl. 8 fd min

C010

0 %

C026

10 V

5 V

20 mA

Kl. 8

If, for instance, the control range of a pressure control (C0005 = -6-) is to be limited to a value lower than the rated sensor value, the effective pressure setpoint can be proportionally reduced under C0027.

-

-

-

Example:

Pressure sensor 0 - 200 mbar (= P r

) at E1.

Analog input of the pressure setpoint via terminal 8.

The max. pressure is to be limited to 120 mbar under C0027:

C0027

P

1

P r

ô 100 %

120 mbar

200 mbar

ô 100 % 60 %

-

-

-

-

With C026 < 0 V, f dmin can fall below the value set under C010.

With C005 = -0-, C026 and C027 are not active.

C026 and C027 are only stored in parameter set 1.

For terminal configurations with manual/remote changeover (C007 = -23- ... -27-):

-

- Change between motor potentiometer and manual/remote changeover via terminal (E1 ... E4).

For terminal configurations with manual/remote changeover (C007 = -23- ... -27-, -46-) and the control mode LECOM (C001 = -3-):

- Change between setpoint via master current (C046, process setpoint) and setpoint input possible via terminal (E1 ... E4).

8200SHB0199

7-41

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11.2 Setpoint input using the keypad

Function If you select the operating mode C001 = -1-, the setpoint can be selected by means of the keypad of the operating module.

Adjustment 1.Press key ▲ or ▼ .

2.The display changes and indicates the current setpoint together with SET.

3.Set the setpoint using ▲ or ▼ .

- If the controller is enabled, the changed setpoint has a direct effect on the drive.

- The setpoint is saved when the controller is inhibited. After the controller has been enabled, the drive accelerates or decelerates tothe last setpoint.

Important Setpoints selected by means of the keypad are saved when separating the controller from the mains or interrupting the operation. The drive can start again after controller enable!

-

-

Observe the start conditions under C142:

Series “Standard”: See chapter 7.8, ”Code table”.

Series “HVAC”: See chapter 7.9, ”Code table”.

7-42

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11.3 Setpoint input via JOG frequencies

Code Name

C037 JOG value 1

C038 JOG value 2

C039 JOG value 3

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

20.00 0.00

-480.00

30.00 0.00

-480.00

40.00 0.00

-480.00

Info

{0.02 Hz} 480.00

{0.02 Hz} 480.00 HVAC only

{0.02 Hz} 480.00

{0.02 Hz} 480.00 HVAC only

{0.02 Hz} 480.00

{0.02 Hz} 480.00 HVAC only

Function

IMPORTANT

The setpoint input via JOG frequencies is only active, if C007 is set accordingly

(series “Standard”: see chapter 7.8, “Code table”; series “HVAC”: see chapter 7.9, ”Code table”).

-

-

Activate

JOG value 1 via control terminal E1 or binary coded up to three JOG frequencies via the control terminals E1 and E2.

Activation

Series “Standard”:

Series “HVAC”:

C007 = -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-, -9-, -14-, -15-, -20-, -22-:

Function

Other setpoint source

JOG 1 active

E1

LOW

HIGH

C007 = -0-, -1-, -2-, -16-:

Function

Other setpoint source

JOG 1 active

JOG 2 active

JOG 3 active

C007 = -0-, … -6-, -9-, -14-, -15-, -16-, -20-, -22-, -28-, -29-,

-30-, -35-, -37-

-41-, -46-, -47-, -49-, -50:

Function EX

Other setpoint source LOW

JOG 1 active HIGH

E1

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH or

Function

Other setpoint source

JOG 1 active

JOG 2 active

JOG 3 active

E1 (E3)

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

E2

LOW

LOW

HIGH

HIGH

E2 (E4)

LOW

LOW

HIGH

HIGH

Important

Special features

-

-

The setting of f dmax

The setting of f dmin

(C011) limits the field frequency also for JOG values.

(C010) is not effective for setpoint input by means of JOG values.

The display value of the parameter can be related to an application datum (C500, C501)

(see chapter 7.6.3).

8200SHB0199

7-43

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11.4 Setpoint input via function ”Motor potentiometer”

Function The setpoint input via the function ”Motor potentiometer” is only active, if C007 is set accordingly.

(Series “Standard”: see chapter 7.8, “Code table”; series “HVAC”: see chapter 7.9, ”Code table”).

The field frequency is changed via the set acceleration and deceleration times.

Activation

Series “Standard”: C007 = -10-, -11-, -12-, -13-, -21-:

Function

Setpoint = 0 Hz

Reduce setpoint until f dmin

Increase setpoint until f dmax

Setpoint remains constant

E1

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

E2

LOW

LOW

HIGH

HIGH

Series “HVAC”:

Series “Standard”:

Series “HVAC”:

C007 = -10-, -11-, -12-, -13-, -21-, -23-, -24-, -25-, -26-, -27-, -44-:

Function

Setpoint = 0 Hz (T iQSP

, C105) 1)

Reduce setpoint until f dmin

(T if

, C013) 2)

E1

LOW

HIGH

E2

LOW

LOW

Increase setpoint until f dmax

(T ir

, C012)

Setpoint remains constant

LOW

HIGH

HIGH

HIGH

E3 3)

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

1)

2)

3)

E4 3)

LOW

LOW

HIGH

HIGH f

LOW level at terminals E1 and E2 reduces the setpoint along the QSP ramp (C105) until d

= 0 Hz

Only possible, if the setpoint has exceeded f dmin

Only, if C007 = -44before.

Activation of the function “Motor potentiometer” via normally-closed contacts

C007 = -10- ... -13-, -21-

C007 = -10- ... -13-, -21- ... -27C007 = -44-

E1 E2 E3 E4 20 E1 E2 E3 E4 20

Important

Special features

-

-

-

The setpoint is saved when switching off the mains, when inhibiting the controller, when having fault messages.

Exception:

If the control terminals are set to LOW in the event of mains failure (e.g. external voltage supply), the setpoint 0 Hz will be stored.

Activation of the QSP function (C007 = -13-, -21-) resets the motor potentiometer to 0 Hz.

The terminal configuration C007 = -13- provides an open-circuit protection for quick stop.

7-44

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Level inversion

Only series “HVAC”:

The function “Motor potentiometer” can be influenced through level inversion.

Example

C114 = -3-

- Terminals E1 and E2 are level inverted. The function “Motor potentiometer” is then activated according to the following table:

Function

Setpoint = 0 Hz (T iQSP

, C105) 1)

Reduce setpoint until f dmin

(T if

, C013) 2)

Increase setpoint until f dmax

(T ir

, C012)

Setpoint remains constant

1)

2)

E1

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

E2

HIGH

HIGH

LOW

LOW f

HIGH level at terminals E1 and E2 reduce the setpoint via the QSP ramp (C105) until d

= 0 Hz.

Only possible, if the setpoint has exceeded f dmin before.

Activation of the function “Motor potentiometer” via normally-open contacts.

E1 E2 E3 E4 20

C007 = -26-

- The JOG value has priority over the function “Motor potentiometer”.

8200SHB0199

7-45

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11.5 Setpoint input via function ”Motor potentiometer in combination with JOG value”

Function

-

-

The setpoint input via the function ”Motor potentiometer in combination with JOG value” is only active, if C007 is set accordingly (see chapter 7.8, ”Code table”).

The field frequency is changed:

For acceleration over acceleration ramp C012.

For deceleration:

- via the deceleration ramp C013 (820X controllers),

- via the quick-stop ramp C105 (821X/822X/824X controllers).

Activation C007 = -22-:

Function

DOWN

CW rotation

CCW rotation

UP

CONSTANT

JOG

Setpoint

0 Hz determined by E1/E2 determined by E1/E2 f dmax

(C011) constant

JOG value 1 (C037)

*

*

0

K1

*

0

1

*arbitrary

0

*

*

*

1

K2

*

0

1

0

0

0

K3

1

0

1

0

0

0

K4

0

Important

Special features

In the event of maloperation, i.e. UP = E2 and DOWN = E3 both activated, the controller is set to

0 Hz.

The field-frequency value activated via the motor-potentiometer function represents the max. limit value for the JOG function E1, i.e. it is not possible to activate a JOG value higher than the last motor-potentiometer value. Smaller values are however possible.

In the event of mains disconnection (interruption > approx. 10 s) the last motor potentiometer value will not be stored, i.e. the new start value is 0 Hz.

With CCW rotation (E3 = 1, E4 = 1) the ”DOWN” function changes from E3 = 1 to E4 = 0.

The function can be influenced through level inversion of the terminals (C114).

(Only series “HVAC”)

E1 E2 E3 E4 20

K1 K2 K3 K4

JOG1 UP DOWN ccw rotation

FIG 7-4 Control of the motor-potentiometer function, C007= -22-

7-46

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.11.6 Setpoint sum

Only “HVAC” controllers

C049* Additional setpoint

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-480.00

Function

Special features

{0.02 Hz} 480.00

Info

Display only

-

-

-

-

In controlled operation(C005 = -1-, -2-) the setpoint sum can be generated with the signal of the analog input (terminal 8) or the digital frequency at terminal E1 or the function “Motor potentiometer” or the process setpoint C046 (LECOM).

The additional setpoint is indicated under C049.

The display value of the parameter can be related to an application datum (C500, C501).

(see chapter 7.6.3)

8200SHB0199

7-47

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.12

Controller enable RFR

Function Terminal 28 controls the controller enable.

Activation

Important

-

-

LOW level: Controller inhibited

HIGH level: Controller enabled

During operation with the 8201BB operating module, you can inhibit the controller with the STP key and enable it again by pressing the RUN key. Here control terminal 28 and the keypad of the operating module have the same effect as two separate switches connected in series.

For control via a fieldbus module, the controller enable via terminal 28 still has priority.

7-48

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.13

Start conditions/flying-restart circuit

Code Name

C142 ¤ Start condition

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart active

Info

Function

Drive performance

Important

Series “HVAC”:

IMPORTANT

Determines the controller performance after mains connection or reconnection. With activated flying-restart circuit, the controller automatically synchronises to a coasting motor after mains disconnection. For this, the controller calculates the output frequency required for the current speed of the coasting motor, the controller is then connected and accelerates the motor to the selected setpoint. Steady and soft deceleration and acceleration is therefore possible.

Start options with flying-restart circuit

C142 = -0-

- After mains disconnection, the drive does not start before LOW/HIGH level change at the input ctrl. enable (term. 28). The operating module displays AS_LC (Autostart-Lockout).

C142 = -1-

- After mains disconnection, the drive starts automatically if a HIGH level is assigned to.

Start options with flying-restart circuit

C142 = -2-

- Start with flying-restart circuit after a LOW/HIGH level change at input ctrl. enable (term. 28).

The operating module displays AS_LC.

C142 = -3-

- Automatic start with flying-restart circuit, if a HIGH level is assigned to ctrl. enable.

-

-

The flying-restart circuit must not be used, if several motors with different inertias are connected to a controller.

The flying-restart circuit does only search the selected direction of rotation for the synchronisation.

-

-

The flying restart works properly for drives with high moments of inertia.

Machines with low moments of inertia and small friction:

- With activated flying-restart circuit, the motor can start briefly or reverse from standstill after enabling the controller.

The flying-restart circuit must only be used during operation with a PID controller, if a speed proportional signal is assigned to C0051!

- With a normalisation to an application datum (see page 7-63), it is absolutely necessary to check whether C0051 contains a speed proportional value.

Note!

If the flying-restart circuit is not required for every drive start, but only after mains reconnection:

bridge terminal 28 and start the controller with the “QSP” function (C142 = -3and C106 = 0 s),

the flying-restart circuit is now only activated for the first mains connection.

8200SHB0199

7-49

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14

Function of the inputs to be configured block by block

C007

-11-

-12-

-13-

-14-

-15-

-16-

-17-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-8-

-9-

-10-

-24-

-25-

-26-

-27-

-28-

-18-

-19-

-20-

-21-

-22-

-23-

-29-

-30-

-31-

-32-

-33-

-34-

-35-

-36-

-37-

-38-

-39-

E1 E2

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

JOG 1 DC injection brake

JOG 1

JOG 1

JOG 1

TRIP set

TRIP set

JOG 1

DOWN

PAR

TRIP set

TRIP set

DC injection brake

PAR

TRIP set

UP

DOWN

DOWN

DOWN

JOG 1

UP

UP

UP

DC injection brake

JOG 1 PAR

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

DC injection brake PAR

TRIP set

TRIP set

JOG 1

DOWN

JOG 1

DOWN

DOWN

DOWN

DOWN

DOWN

D/F

PAR

DC injection brake

TRIP set

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

I-OFF

I-OFF

I-OFF

I-OFF

I-OFF

I-OFF

I-OFF

PAR

PAR

PAR

TRIP set

TRIP set

E3 E4

DC injection brake

PAR

QSP

PAR

QSP

DC injection brake

PAR

PAR

QSP

QSP

TRIP set

DC injection brake

PAR

QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/QSP

CW/CCW

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

H/RE

PAR

DC injection brake

H/RE

H/RE

JOG1

TRIP set

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

H/RE

H/RE

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CW/CCW

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

DC injection brake

QSP

QSP

QSP

JOG 1

JOG 1

DC injection brake

TRIP set

PAR

CW/QSP

QSP

CCW/QSP

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

QSP

QSP

CCW/QSP

CCW/QSP

PAR CCW/QSP

JOG 1, JOG 2, JOG 3

7-50

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function

Important

820X

821X/822X/824X

Special features

820X

821X/822X/824X

Series “HVAC”

C007

-40-

-41-

-42-

-43-

-44-

-45-

-46-

-47-

-48-

-49-

-50-

-51-

E1

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

JOG1

JOG1

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

E2

TRIP set

TRIP set

TRIP set

TRIP set

PAR

PAR

QSP

H/Re

I-OFF

QSP

I-OFF

I-OFF

E3

QSP

DC injection brake

DC injection brake

QSP

DOWN

QSP

PAR

CCW/QSP

DC injection brake

JOG1

JOG1

PAR

E4

JOG1

JOG1

QSP

CW/CCW

UP

CW/CCW

H/Re

CW/QSP

INFL_0

INFL_0

INFL_0

DCB

Depending on your application you can select a function group under C007. A binary signal code at the digital inputs E1 ... E4 activates the functions.

Response time of the inputs E1 ... E4:

16 ... 24 ms

2.5 ... 4 ms

The digital inputs E1 ... E4 are without function when using the operating mode ”Control via

LECOM” (C001 = -3-).

With the operating mode ”Control via LECOM” (C001= -3-), the functions ”TRIP set” and ”QSP” remain effective.

-

-

With the operating mode ”Control via LECOM” (C001= -3-), the functions ”TRIP set” and ”QSP” remain effective. They can be switched-off with the priority mask (C115).

The levels for the input terminals can be inverter under C114.

Use the following terminal configuration, if terminal E1 is used for the setpoint or the act. value:

(see chapter 7.5.14.9)

- C007 = -28- ... -45, -48- ... -51-

8200SHB0199

7-51

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.1 Level inversion for digital inputs

Only “HVAC” controllers

Code Name

C114 ¤ Signal level digital inputs

Function

Adjustment

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

-91

-101

-111

-121

-131

-141

-15-

0

0

0

0

0

0

E4

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

E3

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

E2

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

E1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

Info

IMPORTANT

0: Ex is not inverted

1: Ex is inverted

The levels of the digital inputs E1 ... E4 can be adapted according to the available signal levels.

Example

-

-

Task:

Terminal configuration C007 = -0- is set.

The DC-injection brake is to be activated via a LOW level at terminal E3.

Solution:

Set level inversion C114 = -4-.

- Terminal E3 reacts on LOW level, the DCB is activated.

7-52

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.2 Priority mask for digital inputs

Only “HVAC” controllers

Code Name

C115 ¤ Priority mask digital inputs

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

-91

-101

-111

-121

0

0

1

-131

-141

-151

0

0

0

0

E4

0

0

Function

Adjustment

Important

E3

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

E2

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

E1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

Info

IMPORTANT

0: Function Ex depends on C001

1: Function Ex is independent of C001

Independently of the operating mode C001 = -3- (control via LECOM), it is possible to activate

additional digital inputs.

- It is now possible to use additional control functions via terminals E1 ... E4. The signals are assigned by means of an OR link.

C115 = -0- is always active with terminal configuration (C007) with manual/remote changeover.

Example

-

-

The DC injection brake is to be activated via terminal 3:

Operating mode C001 = -3- (control via LECOM).

Terminal configuration C007 = -0-.

Solution:

Set the priority mask C115 = -4-

- The DC injection brake can now be activated via terminal E3.

-

-

Controller inhibit and TRIP reset always have priority.

With C115 = -0-, also TRIP set and QSP have priority.

8200SHB0199

7-53

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.3 Change of the direction of rotation (CW/CCW)

Function

Not failsafe change of the direction of rotation

Settings

C007 = -0- ... -13-, or

C007 = -0- ... -13-, -23-, -43-, -45- (only series “HVAC”) enable the change of the motor direction via terminal E4.

-

-

The change depends on the set times T ir

(C012) and T if

(C013), the connected ramp function generator S-shape (C182). (Series “HVAC”)

Adjustment

Important

When connecting the controller in phase

a CW field of rotation will occur at LOW signal,

a CCW field of rotation will occur at HIGH level.

Series “HVAC”: The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1).

In the event of wire breakage or a failure of the external voltage supply, the direction of rotation can be changed.

CW/CCW changeover only in the main setpoint.

Function

Adjustment

Important

Failsafe change of the direction of rotation

Settings

C007 = -14- ... -22-, or

C007 = -14- ... -22-, -34-, -47- (only series “HVAC”) enable the failsafe change of the direction of rotation via terminals E3 and E4.

-

-

The change depends on the set times T ir

(C012) and T if

(C013), the connected ramp function generator S-shape (C182). (Series “HVAC”)

Function

CCW rotation

CW rotation

Quick stop

Unchanged

E3 *

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

E4 *

HIGH

LOW

LOW

HIGH

* Series “HVAC”: The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1).

If a HIGH signal is assigned to terminals E3 and E4, the terminal signal which was activated first determines the direction of rotation.

If a HIGH signal is assigned to terminals E3 and E4 when connecting the mains, the controller will activate the quick stop function.

-

-

CW/CCW changeover only in the main setpoint.

For speed control with actual value feedback, the CW/CCW changeover is not possible.

7-54

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.4 Quick stop QSP

Setting range 820X

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C013 Deceleration time T if

820X 5.00

0.00

{0.05 s} 999.00

Info

IMPORTANT

Setting range 821X/822X/824X

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C105 Deceleration time quick stop

821X/822X/824X

5.00

0.00

0.00

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

Info

999.00

1300.00 HVAC only

IMPORTANT

Function

820X

821X/822X/824X

Activation

Series “Standard”:

Series “HVAC”:

Special features

821X/822X/824X

Series “HVAC”:

If you activate the function quick stop, the drive will be decelerated to standstill over the set deceleration time (C013). If the value falls below f activated.

d

= 0.1Hz, the DC-injection brake (DCB) will be

The activation of quick stop decelerates the drive to standstill according to the deceleration time set und C105. If f d falls below the threshold C019, the DC-injection brake (DCB) will be activated.

C007 = -14- ... -22-:

- LOW level at terminals E3 and E4

-

- HIGH level at terminals E3 and E4 when switching on the mains

C007 = -2-, -4-, -8-, -9-, -13-:

- LOW level at terminal E3

C007 = -14- ... -22-, -34-, -47-:

- LOW level at terminals E3 and E4

-

- HIGH level at terminals E3 and E4 when switching on the mains

C007 = -46-, -49-:

- LOW level at terminal E2

C007 = -2-, -4-, -8-, -9-, -13-, -30-, -31-, -32-, -36-, -37-, -40-, -43-, -45-:

- LOW level at terminal E3

C007 = -33-, -42-:

- LOW level at terminal E4

The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1).

Independently of the operating mode C001, quick stop can always be activated via terminals.

-

-

The activation of quick stop via terminals can be switched-off with the priority mask (C115).

Quick stop acts on the main setpoint only. Quick stop does not have an effect on the additional setpoint (C049) and the correction value of the process controller (software level 3.0).

8200SHB0199

7-55

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.5 DC-injection brake (DCB)

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C019 Threshold auto DC brake

821X/822X/824X 0.10

0.10

0.00

C035* ¤ Selection DC brake -0-0-

-1-

Info

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

Selection of brake voltage under

C036

Selection of brake current under

C036

5.00

5.00 HVAC only

HVAC only

{0.02 %}

{0.02 %}

40.00

150.00 HVAC only

C036 Voltage for DC brake

Voltage/current for

DCB

* 0.00

0.00

C106 Holding time for autom. DC injection brake

820X 0.00

0.00

821X/822X

824X

C196* ¤ Input condition autom. DC injection brake

0.02

0.00

-0-0-

-1-

{0.01s}

{0.01s}

50.00

999.00

DC brake active at C050 < C019

DC brake active at C050

< C019 and Setpoint < C019

HVAC only

IMPORTANT

*depends on the unit

Function

Activation

Important

Special features

820X

821X/822X/824X

Series “Standard”:

DC braking enables fast deceleration of the drive to standstill without using a brake unit.

Via terminal

- C007 = -3-, -7-, -14-, 19:

HIGH level at terminal E2

The DC-injection brake remains active until a LOW signal is reassigned to terminal E2.

- C007 = -0-, -5-, -11-:

HIGH level at terminal E3

The DC-injection brake remains active until a LOW signal is reassigned to terminal E3.

Automatically

- If the field-frequency setpoint falls below the operating threshold, the DC-injection brake will be activated for the holding time set under C106. Afterwards, the drive will set controller inhibit.

The DC-motor current is directly set under code C036 (voltage for DC brake). Please observe, that the connected motor can be overheated by overlong operation and excessive DC-motor current.

Fixed operating threshold for DCB f d

= 0.1 Hz.

Operating threshold for DC brake adjustable under C019.

The display value of the parameter can be related to an application datum.

7-56

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Function

Adjustment

Activation via terminals

E1 ... E4

Automatic activation

Important

Series “HVAC”:

-

-

DC braking enables fast deceleration of the drive to standstill without using a brake unit.

The brake torque is lower as for braking in generator mode (via chopper or DC-bus operation).

- The possible brake torque is approx. 20 % ... 30 % of the rated motor torque.

-

-

A brake voltage or a brake current can be selected.

C196 enables an improved motor start when the automatic DC-injection brake is activated

(e.g. for hoists).

The DCB function is activated either automatically when falling below the threshold set under

C019 or via dig. input terminals E1 ... E4 (depending on C007).

With the auto-DCB function, also a dead band in the setpoint can be set via C019. If DC braking is not required here, set C106 = 0.

Special features

1.Select, whether a brake voltage (C035 = -0-) or a brake current is to be entered.

2.Select the brake voltage or brake current in per cent under C036.

- With C035 = -0-, the indication refers to the rated controller voltage [V r

].

- With C035 = -1-, the indication refers to the rated controller current [I r

].

3.Select how to activate the DC-injection brake (DCB):

- Via terminals E1 ... E4

- Automatically

Setting C007 High level at Function

-17-

-3-, -7-, -14-, 19

-0-, -5-, -11-, -25-,

-29-, -41-, -42-, -48-

-31-, -36-, -51-

*

Terminal E1

Terminal E2

Terminal E3

Terminal E4

*

*

*

* DCB remains active until a LOW signal is assigned to terminal E1.

DCB remains active until a LOW signal is assigned to terminal E2.

DCB remains active until a LOW signal is assigned to terminal E3.

DCB remains active until a LOW signal is assigned to terminal E4.

The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1).

1.Select under C106:

- C106 = 0,00 - auto DCB is not active (no reaction on f d

< C019).

- C106 > 0.00 - the DC injection brake is active for the time set. Afterwards, the drive will set controller inhibit.

2.Select the input conditions for the automatic DC injection braking under C196.

- C196 = -0- DCB active, if C050 < C019

- C196 = -1- GSB active, if C050 < C019 and setpoint < C019

3.Set the operating threshold under C019.

- The operating threshold indicates, when the DC injection brake is activated (see step 2.).

C035 = -1-

- The DC motor current is directly set under C036 (ref. to rated controller current).

C035 = -0-

- The DC motor current is indirectly set under C036 (ref. to rated controller voltage).

Please observe, that the connected motor can be overheated by overlong operation and excessive

DC-motor current.

Set the operating threshold for auto DCB under C019. The display value of the parameter can be related to an application datum (C500, C501) (see chapter 7.6.3.)

-

-

With C106 = 0.00, the automatic DC-injection brake is not active.

C035 and C196 are only stored in parameter set 1.

8200SHB0199

7-57

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.6 Parameter set changeover PAR

Function Switches between the two parameter sets (ONLINE) during controller operation.

Activation

Series “HVAC”:

C007 = -4-, -8-, -15-, -17, -18-, or

C007 = -4-, -8-, -15-, -17-, -18-, -35-, -36-, -37-, -44-, -45- (only series “HVAC”)

- LOW level at terminal E2 activates PAR1

- HIGH level at terminal E2 activates PAR2

C007 = -1-, -3-, -6-, -7-, -12-, or

C007 = -1-, -3-, -6-, -7-, -12-, -24-, -33-, -38-, -46-, -51- (only series “HVAC”)

- LOW level at terminal E3 activates PAR1

- HIGH level at terminal E3 activates PAR2

The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1)

Important -

-

In the code level the active code set is indicated by blinking of ”PAR1” or ”PAR2”.

The codes marked with *in the code table are similar for PAR1 and PAR2. The active parameter set is only displayed on the operating module in the code level.

For changeover between the parameter sets via terminal, the same terminal of both parameter sets must be assigned with PAR.

Special features

821X/822X/824X If the control mode (C014) is set differently in the parameter sets, the parameter sets should only be changed when the controller is inhibited.

7.5.14.7 TRIP set

Function If the function TRIP set is activated, the unit detects external faults that can thus be taken into account. The controller indicates the fault EEr and sets controller inhibit.

Activation

Series “HVAC”:

Important

C007 = -7-, -8-, -18-, -19-:

- LOW level at terminal E1

C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-, or

C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-, -38-...-43- (only series “HVAC”):

-

- LOW level at terminal E2

C007 = -10-, or

C007 = -10-, -27- (only series “HVAC”):

-

- LOW level at terminal E3

C007 = -32-:

- LOW level at terminal E4 (only series “HVAC”)

The signal levels are indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1)

For fault reset, see chapter 8.4, ”Reset of fault messages”.

Special features

820X

821X/822X/824X

Series “HVAC”:

With the operating mode ”control via LECOM” (C001 = -3-), the function TRIP set cannot be activated via terminals.

-

-

Independently of the operating mode C001, TRIP set can always be activated via terminals.

The activation of TRIP set via terminals can be switched-off with the priority mask (C115).

7-58

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.8 Manual/remote changeover

Only “HVAC” controllers

Function

Activation

Important

With manual/remote changeover (H/Re), it is for instance possible to change from remote operation to manual operation in the event of setting-up the drive or service.

- For manual operation, the remote operation must not be changed (e. g. LECOM).

- In manual operation, the setpoint is entered via potentiometer or motor potentiometer.

The function “Motor potentiometer” is activated via terminal E1 ... E4.

-

- If the function “Motor potentiometer” is activated, the operating mode is set to

C001-internal = -0-.

The change between manual and remote operation can only be carried out through terminals

E1 ... E4. The following changeover is possible:

- Fieldbus  Function “Motor potentiometer”

- Fieldbus  Analog terminal setpoint (terminal 8, terminal E1, additional setpoint)

- Function “Motor potentiometer”  Analog terminal setpoint (terminal 8, terminal E1, additional setpoint)

C007 = -47-:

HIGH level at terminal E2

- Manual operation, function “Motor potentiometer” is active, C001-internal = -0-

- Setpoint selection via analog channel

C007 = -23-, -24-, -25-, -26-, -27-:

HIGH level at terminal E4

- Manual operation, function “Motor potentiometer” is active, C001-internal = -0-

- Setpoint selection via UP (term. E2), DOWN (term. E1)

C007 = -46:

HIGH level at terminal E4

- Manual operation, function “Motor potentiometer” is active, C001-internal = -0-

- Setpoint selection via analog channel

C007 = -23-, -24-, -25-, -26-, -27-, -46-, -47-:

LOW level at terminal E2 (if C007 = -47-) or terminal E4

- Remote operation, function “Motor potentiometer” is not active, C001-internal = C001

- Setpoint selection via C046, analog channel or JOG frequency

The signal level is indicated for C114 = -0- (see chapter 7.5.14.1).

Safety functions ctrl. inhibit and QSP activated in remote operation are reset when changing to manual operation. Check, whether the master sets these safety functions again when changing from manual operation to remote operation.

8200SHB0199

7-59

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.14.9 Digital frequency input

Only “HVAC” controllers

C425 ¤ * Adjustment of digital frequency

C426* Gain adjustment frequency input E1

C427 Offset adjustment frequency input E1

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-2-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

100.0 -200.0

Dig.-freq. Resolution Scanning Max.-freq.

100 Hz 1/200

1 kHz 1/200

1 s

100 ms

300 Hz

3 kHz

10 kHz 1/200 10 ms 10 kHz

10 kHz 1/1000 50 ms 10 kHz

10 kHz 1/10000 500 ms 10 kHz

{0.1 %} 200.0

0.0

-12.5

{0.1 %} 12.5

Function

Info

Adjustment

Important

Special features

Select a digital frequency of 0 Hz ... 10 kHz as setpoint or as actual value using terminal E1.

With C007 = -28- ... -45-, -48-, -49-, -50-, -51-, the terminal E1 is configured for this function.

C425

- Selection of the frequency to be assigned to terminal E1.

-

- Resolution and scanning time for reading the frequency.

C426

- Sets the gain of the input signal. 100 % corresponds to a gain factor = 1.

- If E1 is used as actual value, C426 must be set as positive value, e.g. for pressure control, if the motor speed is to increase when the pressure falls.

C427

- Sets the offset of the input signal.

-

- If C427 = -12.5 %, an offset of -20 % is internally set for the input.

Select input E1 for master current 4 mA ... 20 mA:

- Use an analog plug-in module 8279.

- Set C426 = 125 %.

- Set C427 = -12.5 %.

-

-

When using the analog input module 8279 for the frequency input E1:

- Set C425 = -2-, -3- or -4-.

With C005 = -0-, C425 and C426 are not active.

C425, C426, C427 are only stored in parameter set 1.

For higher accuracy requirements at 10 kHz digital frequency, select a higher resolution under

C425 taking into account the scanning time.

-

-

After addition to the signal at terminal E1, the offset (C427) is only effective as positive value

(see signal flow-chart in chapter 16.3.2, as of software version 3.0).

The digital frequency refers to internal normalisation (e.g. C011 etc.)

The maximum frequency is the maximum to be processed by the input E1. If the value is exceeded, it must be adapted proportionally under C426.

7-60

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.5.15

Indirect torque limitation

Only “HVAC” controllers

C005

Function

Adjustment

Example

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-3Open loop operation via frequency input E1 with limitation of the apparent motor current via terminal 8

Info

C005 = -3possible with

C014 = -2-, -4-

With C005 = -3-, the apparent motor current (indirect torque limitation) can be limited with an external signal via the analog input terminal 8. Enter a motor current limit.

The influence of the torque limitation is adjusted via the analog input terminal 8

(see chapter 7.5.11.1).

-

-

-

The effective current limit is indicated in % in C047.

C022 has no influence. The external signal via terminal 8 selects the current limit.

C023 remains effective.

Constant mass flow control:

8200 f

M cold heavy air/discharge Fan warm light mass flow m = const.

8200SHB0199

7-61

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.6

Display functions

7.6.1

Display values

C040 Controller enable

C046 Frequency setpoint

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

* -0-

-1-

* -480.00

Controller inhibited

Controller enabled

{0.02 %}

Info

HVAC only *see Operating

Instructions 2102

C047* Current setpoint

I max limit value

C049* Additional setpoint

C050* Output frequency

C051* Actual PID controller value

C052* Motor voltage

C053* DC-bus voltage

480.00 [Hz]

HVAC only

[%]

HVAC only

[Hz]

HVAC only

Display only

150 % for rated value at term. 8 and factory setting

Display only

Only if C005 = -1-,

-2-

Display only

Display only

C054* Motor current

C056* Unit load

C061* Temperature

Heat sink

Function

[Hz]

[Hz]

HVAC only

[V]

[V]

HVAC only

[A]

[%]

[°C]

Display only

Display only

Display only

Display only

Display only

Some parameters, which are measured by the controller during operation, can be displayed on the

8201BB operating module.

Important

Series “HVAC”:

Display under C050 corresponds to the setpoint without slip compensation (C021).

-

-

Display under C047:

- If C005 = -0-, -1-, -2-, -6-, -7-, “ I max limit value (C022).

Display under C049, only if C005 = -1- and -2-.

Special features

821X/822X/824

Series “HVAC”:

The display value of a parameter can be related to an application datum (see chapter 7.6.3).

Codes C046, C049, C050, C051:

Hz display only in factory setting (C500 = 2000; C501 = 10)

(see chapter 7.6.3).

7.6.2

Function

Switch-on display

C004 ¤ Switch-on display

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

Field frequency f d

Unit load (C056)

(C050)

Motor current (C054)

Info

The here selected display is active after mains connection, if the 8201BB operating module is plugged on.

7-62

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.6.3

Normalisation of an application datum

820X setting range: This function is not available.

Setting range 821X/822X/824X:

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C500* Display factor

Application datum numerator

821X/822X/824X 2000 1

C501* Display factor for process variable denominator

821X/822X/824X 10 1

{1}

{1}

25000

25000

Info

Function

Adjustment

Example

Important

Adaptation of field-frequency related parameters

C010, C011, C017, C019, C037, C038, C039, C050, or

C010, C011, C017, C019, C037, C038, C039, C046, C049, C050, C051, C181, C625, C626,

C627 (series “HVAC”) to an application datum to be controlled, e.g. pressure, temperature, flow rate, humidity or speed.

-

-

The normalisation implements an absolute or relative selection of an application datum.

All codes indicated are normalised at the same time.

The display value is calculated from:

CXXX

C011

200

ô

C500

C501

The speed setpoint is to be input and displayed as relative or absolute value.

Values: P set

= 5 bar, if f dmax

= 50 Hz (C011) a) Relative normalisation in %

100.00 (%)

50

200

ô 4000

10 e.g. C500 = 4000, C501 = 10 b) Absolute normalisation in physical units

5.00 (bar)

50

200

ô

200

10 e.g. C500 = 200; C501 = 10

-

-

All codes indicated above are normalised at the same time.

After a normalisation, the output frequency [Hz] (C050) can only be recalculated with the display factors C500 and C501.

8200SHB0199

7-63

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.6.4

Elapsed operating time meter

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C178* Operating time

C179* Mains connection time

Function

Info

[h]

[h]

Display only

Display only

The following times can be displayed:

- Operating time: Time during which the controller is enabled.

- Mains connection time: Time during which the controller is connected to the mains.

7.6.5

Code

Software version and controller type

Name

C093* Type

C099* Software version

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

82xx

82 x.x

Info

Function Reading of type and software version of the controller.

IMPORTANT

Display only

Display only

7-64

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.7

Monitoring functions

7.7.1

Relay outputs

Relay output K1

Code

C008 ¤

Name

Function relay K1

822X/824X

822X/824X

C054* Motor current

C156* Current threshold

Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation

-4Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5-

-6-

-7f

Field frequency f d dset reached

Q min reached

= 0

-8-

-9-

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-10 • C)

-11PTC warning

-12Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156

-13Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold C156 and f d

> Q min threshold (C017)

-14Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156 and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

-15Warning motor phase failure

-16f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

0 0 {1 %}

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

150 HVAC only

Function

Series “HVAC”:

Important

IMPORTANT

Display only

To monitor the drive, the changeover contact of the relay K1 - terminals K11, K12, K14 - can be assigned with different functions.

-

-

C008 = -12-, -13-, -14-:

The display value(C054) is smoothened with a ring memory with 500 ms.

The value set under C156 corresponds to a percentage of the rated controller current [I r

].

With the control mode “Square characteristic” (C014 = 3), C156 is internally adapted via the field frequency (C011):

C156 internal

[%] C156 [%] ô fd 2

C011 2

[Hz 2 ]

[Hz 2 ]

For instance, a belt monitoring can be implemented with this function extension.

C156 is only stored in PAR1.

8200SHB0199

7-65

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Switching conditions f

Monitoring functions

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation;

Motor is running / CCW rotation

Field frequency f dset

Q min

I max reached reached reached

Overtemperature

TRIP, Q min d or IMP

= 0

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Relay energised when controller is ready

-

drop-out when

TRIP fault message

Undervoltage/overvoltage energised with TRIP fault message energised when f d

0 Hz energised when f d

0 Hz, direction of rotation via terminal

CCW rotation: f

CW rotation: f d d

> 0 Hz,

< 0 Hz energised when f d

f dset

= 0 Hz, t if

= 0 Hz, because over

DC brake active

Controller inhibited energised when f d

= f dset energised when f d

> f dQmin

(C017)

-

energised when motor current =

I max motor mode (C022)

I max generator mode (C023) energised when the heat sink temperature = J max

-10 • C

-

-

drop-out when

TRIP fault message f d

$ f dQmin

Pulse inhibit because of controller inhibit, overvoltage or undervoltage drop-out when

connected PTC thermistor has detected motor overtemperature.

drop-out when I motor

(C054) < current threshold (C156)

PTC warning

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold and f d

> Q min threshold (C017)

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold and ramp-function generator input = ramp-function generator output

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Warning motor phase failure

(only “HVAC” controllers) f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

(only “HVAC” controllers) f drop-out when I motor d

> f dQmin

(C017)

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and drop-out when I motor

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and ramp-function generator input = ramp-function generator output energised in the event of a motor-phase failure energised when f d

> C010

7-66

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Code

Relay output K2

Setting range 820X/821X: K2 not available.

Setting range 822X/824X:

Name

C117 ¤ Function relay K2

822X/824X

822X/824X

C054* Motor current

C156* Current threshold

Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation

-4Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

-9f

Field frequency f d dset reached

Q min reached

= 0

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-10 • C)

-11PTC warning

-12Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156

-13Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold C156 and f d

> Q min threshold (C017)

-14Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156 and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

-15Warning motor phase failure

-16f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

0 0 {1 %}

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

150 HVAC only

Function

Series “HVAC”:

Important

IMPORTANT

Display only

The changeover contact of relay K2 - terminals K21, K22, K24 - can be assigned with different function to monitor the drive.

-

-

-

C008 = -12-, -13-, -14-:

The display value (C054) is smoothened with a ring memory with 500 ms.

The value set under C156 corresponds to a percentage of the rated controller current [I frequency (C011): r

].

With the control mode “Square characteristic” (C014 = 3), C156 is internally adapted via the field

C156 internal fd 2

[%] C156 [%] ô

C011 2

[Hz 2 ]

[Hz 2 ]

For instance, a belt monitoring can be implemented with this function extension.

C156 is only stored in PAR1.

8200SHB0199

7-67

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Switching conditions f

Monitoring functions

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation;

Motor is running / CCW rotation

Field frequency f dset reached

Q min reached

I max reached

Overtemperature

TRIP, Q min d or IMP

= 0

(only “HVAC” controllers)

PTC warning

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold and f d

> Q min

-threshold (C017)

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Apparent motor current

< current threshold and ramp-function generator input = ramp-function generator output

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Warning motor phase failure

(only “HVAC” controllers) f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

(only “HVAC” controllers)

Relay energised when controller is ready

-

drop-out when

TRIP fault message

Undervoltage/overvoltage energised with TRIP fault message energised when f d

0 Hz energised when f d

0 Hz, direction of rotation via terminal

CCW rotation: f d

> 0 Hz,

CW rotation: f d

< 0 Hz energised when f d

-

= 0 Hz, because f dset

= 0 Hz, t if over

DC-injection brake active

Controller inhibited energised when f d

= f dset energised when f d

> f dQmin

(C017) energised when motor current =

-

-

I max motor mode (C022)

I max generator mode (C023) energised when the heat sink temperature = J max

-10 • C

-

-

drop-out when f

TRIP fault message d

$ f dQmin

Pulse inhibit because of controller inhibit, overvoltage or undervoltage drop-out when

connected PTC thermistor has detected motor overtemperature.

drop-out when I motor

(C054) < current threshold (C156) f drop-out when I motor d

> f dQmin

(C017)

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and drop-out when I motor

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and ramp-function generator input = ramp-function generator output energised in the event of a motor-phase failure energised when f d

> C010

7-68

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.7.2

Analog output

Code Name

C108* Gain (C111)

C111 ¤ Monitor signal

822X/824X

822X/824X

Possible settings

Lenze Choice Info

128 0

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

{1}

Field frequency

Unit load

Motor current

DC bus voltage

Motor power

255

-5-

-6-

-7-

Motor voltage

Analog output 1/f d

(1/C050)

Field frequency of f dmin

(C010) ... f dmax

(C011)

Actual PID controller value -8-

-9Ready for operation

-10TRIP fault message

-11Motor is running

-12Motor is running / CW rotation

-13Motor is running / CCW rotation

-14Field frequency f d

= 0

-15f dset reached

-16Q min reached

-17I max reached

-18Overtemperature ( Ô max

-10 • )

-19TRIP, Q min or IMP set

-20PTC warning

-21Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold (C156)

-22Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and f d

> Q min threshold

-23Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold (C156) and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

-24Warning motor phase failure

-25f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

HVAC only

Function

Series “HVAC”:

IMPORTANT

-

-

-

To monitor the drive, you can output different process value as standardised voltage via terminal 62.

With C111 = -0-, C108 = 0 ... 225 corresponds to an output voltage of 0 V ... 10 V

(at f d

= C011).

- With C111, C108 = 128 corresponds to an output voltage of 6 V (factory setting).

If C111 = -6-, the analog output is reciprocal to the field frequency of the motor. This function can for instance be used for the external display of a cycle time

- of a product or

- through a furnace.

8200SHB0199

7-69

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Adjustment

Series “HVAC”:

Important

Series “HVAC”:

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

C111 820X:

821X/822X/824X:

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-8-

6 V, if f d

= f dmax

3 V, if C056 = 100 %

Voltage at terminal 62, if C108 = 220

Voltage at terminal 62, if C108 = 128

3 V, if C054 = rated controller current

820X:

821X/822X/824X:

3 V at rated power, P r

6 V, if V

DC

6 ,V if V

DC

= C052 *C056

4.8 V at motor voltage = 400 V

= 380 VDC

= 1000 VDC

2 V, if C011 = 50 Hz, C050 = 20 Hz

Monitor output voltage [V] 6.00V

ô f d

C011

C011 C010

6 V, if C051 = f dmax

The gain of the analog output (C108) can be adjusted ONLINE.

C111 = -9- to C111 = -25- correspond to the relay output functions C008 and C117:

- LOW = 0 V

- HIGH = 10 V

Series “HVAC”:

C111 = -6Normalisation of the monitor output voltage with a reciprocal field frequency output:

0RQLWRU RXWSXW YROWDJH >9@ 9 ô

& >+]@

& >+]@

ô

&

6.00

5.00

C108 = 128

4.00

3.00

2.00

1.00

0.00

0 10 20 30 fd [Hz]

40 50 60

7-70

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.7.3

Thermal motor monitoring

7.7.3.1

I 2 x t monitoring

Code Name

C120 I 2 k t switch-off

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0 0

Function

Adjustment

{1 %} 100

Info

IMPORTANT

With the I 2 ¼ t monitoring, self-ventilated three-phase AC motors can be thermally monitored without using sensors.

Enter an individual load limit for the motor connected.

-

- If this values is exceeded for a longer period of time, the controller will set the fault OC6 and switch-off (see chart).

The current limits C022 and C023 only have an indirect influence on the I 2 ¼ t calculation:

- The settings of C022 and C023 can make the operation with maximum controller load (C056) impossible.

When selecting a drive which does not match (output current much higher than rated motor current):

- Reduce C120 by the factor of the mismatch.

Important

Example:

With C120 = 100 % and a load of C056 = 150 %, the controller switches off after 60 s when reaching f d

> 40 Hz, or earlier with f d

< 40 Hz.

-

-

The setting 0 % deactivates the function.

This monitoring does not provide full motor protection since the calculated motor temperature is set to ”0” after every mains connection or disconnection. The connected motor can be overheated, if

- it is already hot but still overloaded,

- the cooling-air stream is interrupted or the air is too hot.

Full motor protection can be achieved with a PTC thermistor in the motor.

- We recommend the general use of PTC monitoring systems for multi-motor drives.

To prevent motors with forced ventilation from starting too early, this function can be deactivated.

-

-

If load-adapted motors are to be monitored at a load of < 100 %, C120 must also be reduced accordingly.

The operation of the controller with 120 % overload might lead to the activation of the I 2 k t switch-off, because the setting of C120 > 100 % is not possible.

- Deactivate the I 2 k t switch-off for the operation of the controller at 120 % overload.

8200SHB0199

7-71

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.7.3.2

PTC input

Setting range 820X/821X: Option, see Accessories

Setting range 822X/824X:

Code Name Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C119 ¤ Function PTC

822X/824X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

PTC input not active

PTC input active

TRIP and IMP inhibit are set (OH3 message)

PTC input active

Warning via relay (adjustable)

Info

Message not visible in the history buffer

(C161 ... C164)

IMPORTANT

Function

Activation

Important

Input for the connection of PTC resistors to DIN44081 and DIN44082. The motor temperature can be detected and integrated in the drive monitoring.

This input can also be used for the connection of a thermostat (normally-close).

1.Connect the monitoring circuit of the motor to the provided terminals T1 and T2.

2.Parameter setting for the evaluation of the PTC signal:

If the PTC evalution detects an overtemperature, it can be evaluated in three ways:

- C119 = -0- PTC not active

- C119 = -1- TRIP

- C119 = -2- warning

The controller can only evaluate a motor-PTC system.

- Several motor-PTC systems connected in parallel or in series are not allowed.

If you connect several motors to an inverter, use thermistors (normally-close) to monitor the motor temperature.

-

- For the evaluation, thermistors can be connected in series.

The OH3 message is activated at approx. R 1.6 k Ω . If, for a functionality test, the PTC input is assigned to a variable resistor, the following occurs:

- R > 2 k

Ω a message is set.

- R < 250

Ω no message is set.

7-72

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.7.4

Motor-phase failure detection

Only series “HVAC”

Setting range 821X: not possible

Setting range 822X/824X:

Code Name

C597* ¤ Activation of motor-phase failure detection

C599 Current limit for motor-phase failure detection

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

5

-2-

1

Inactive

TRIP

Warning

{1 %}

Function

Activation

Fault indication

Important

50

Info

IMPORTANT

If the function is activated under C597, the controller monitors the motor phases for failure. The current limit value (C599) defines the threshold when a motor phase failure is indicated. The value set under C599 corresponds to the percentage of the rated controller current [I r

].

-

-

-

C597 = -0- function not active

C597 = -1- fault message TRIP

C597 = -2- warning message

8201BB operating module:

- TRIP: LP1

-

- Warning: LP1

Fieldbus:

- TRIP: 32

- Warning: 182

C597 and C599 are only stored in parameter set 1.

8200SHB0199

7-73

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7-74

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--D1

00406185

Manual

Part D1

Code table for the series

8200/10/20/40 standard

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.8

Code table for “Standard” series

Column

Code

Name

Lenze

Choice

Info

IMPORTANT

How to read the code table:

*

-

-

1

Abbreviation

C013

C009*

C001 ¤

[C002]

C010 œ

{1 %}

820X

Meaning

-

-

Code C013

The parameter of the code can be different in PAR1 and PAR2.

The parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE).

The parameter value of the code is always the same in PAR1 and PAR2, but is always displayed in PAR1.

The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+ PRG.

The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+ PRG but only, if the controller is inhibited.

Parameter value of the code will only be displayed in [Hz], if C500 = 2000 and

C501 = 10 (factory setting). See chapter 7.6.3.

Name of the code.

Unit-specific setting possibilities (here for 820X).

Without unit designation the code is valid for all unit types.

Factory setting of the code

The column ”Important” contains further information

99 Min. value {Steps/Unit}

Meaning of the code

Max. value

Additional, important explanation of the code

C001 ¤ Operating mode

[C002]* Parameter set

C004 ¤ Switch-on display

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-0-

-1-

-2-

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via 8201BB or

LECOM

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via LECOM

Setpoint selection via LECOM

Control via LECOM

Parameter setting via LECOM

Function executed

Overwrite PAR1 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR2 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR1 and PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR1 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Transmit PAR1 and PAR2 to the operating module

Field frequency f d

Unit load

Motor current

Info

Page 7-9,

7-42

Page 7-10

Page 7-62

8200SHB0199

7-77

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

[C007]* Terminal

C008 ¤ configuration

Function relay K1

C009* ¤ Device address

C010 œ Minimum field frequency

821X/822X/

C011 œ Maximum field frequency

820X 0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

824X

820X 50.00

30.00

821X/822X/

824X

50.00

7.50

C012 Acceleration time T ir

820X 5.00

0.00

821X/822X/

824X

5.00

0.00

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

E4 E3

CW/CCW GSB

CW/CCW PAR

CW/CCW QSP

CW/CCW PAR

E2 E1

JOG1/2/3

JOG1/2/3

JOG1/2/3

GSB JOG1

CW/CCW QSP PAR JOG1

CW/CCW GSB TRIP set JOG1

CW/CCW PAR TRIP set JOG1

CW/CCW PAR GSB TRIP set

-8-

-9-

CW/CCW QSP PAR TRIP set

CW/CCW QSP TRIP set JOG1

-10CW/CCWTRIP set UP DOWN

-11CW/CCW GSB UP DOWN

-12CW/CCW PAR UP DOWN

-13CW/CCW QSP UP DOWN

-14CCW/QSPCW/QSP GSB JOG1

-15CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR JOG1

-16CCW/QSPCW/QSP JOG1/2/3

-17CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR GSB

-18CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR TRIP set

-19CCW/QSPCW/QSP GSB TRIP set

-20CCW/QSPCW/QSPTRIP set JOG1

-21CCW/QSPCW/QSP UP DOWN

-22CCW/QSPCW/QSP UP JOG1

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation

-4Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5Field frequency f d

= 0

-6-

-7f dset reached

Q min reached

-8-

-9-

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-10 • C)

1 1 {1} 99

Info

Page 7-10,

7-44, 7-46,

7-50, 7-54,

7-58,

Page 7-65

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

480.00

480.00

480.00

480.00

999.00

999.00

Page 7-15

Page 7-15

Page 7-16

Only for LECOM applications

R =

CW rotation

L =

CCW rotation

GSB =

DC-injection brake

-

-

-

-

PAR =

Parameter set changeover

JOG =

Fixed frequency

QSP =

Quick stop

TRIP Set =

External fault

UP/DOWN =

Motor potentiometer functions

For parameter set changeover via terminals, the corresponding terminal must be assigned with

PAR in both parameter sets.

7-78

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C013 Deceleration time T if

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

999.00

999.00

Info

Page 7-16,

7-55

821X/822X/

C014 ¤ Control mode

820X 5.00

0.00

5.00

0.00

824X

{0.05 s}

{0.02 s}

Page 7-19,

7-22, 7-24

820X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Linear characteristic V f d auto boost with

Square characteristic V f d

2 auto boost with

Linear characteristic V f d constant V min boost with

Square characteristic V f d

2 constant V min boost with

Motor-current control 821X/822X/

824X

-4-4-

820X 50.00

30.00

821X/822X/

C016 min setting

824X

820X

50.00

7.50

* 0.00

821X/822X/

824X

C017 œ Threshold Q min

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

C018 ¤ Chopper frequency

821X/822X/824X -1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

C019 œ Threshold auto DC brake

821X/822X/824X 0.10

0.10

C021 Slip compensation

{0.05 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 %}

{0.02 %}

{0.02 Hz}

4 kHz power-loss optimised

8 kHz power-loss optimised

12 kHz power-loss optimised

16 kHz power-loss optimised

12 kHz noise optimised

16 kHz noise optimised

{0.02 Hz}

960.00

960.00

40.00

40.00

Page 7-22

Page 7-24

480.00 Page 7-65

5.00

Page 7-29

Page 7-56

Page 7-28

820X 0.0* 0.0

821X/822X/

824X

0.0* 0.0

C022 I max limit

(motor mode)

C023 I max limit

(generator mode)

150

80

30

30

822X/824X 80 30

C034 ¤ Master current -0-0-

-1-

{0.1 %}

{0.1 %}

0 to 20 mA /

{1 %}

{1 %}

{1 %}

0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA

12.0

20.0

150 Page 7-17

110 Page 7-17

150 As of software

1.6

Page 7-40

*depends on the unit

* If C014 = -2-, -3-, controller dependent

The current-limit not active at 30 %.

8200SHB0199

7-79

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C036 Voltage/current for

DCB

C037 œ JOG value 1

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

* 0.00

20.00

0.00

C038 œ JOG value 2

C039 œ JOG value 3

C050* œ Output frequency

30.00

40.00

0.00

0.00

C052* Motor voltage

C054* Motor current

C056* Unit load

C061* Heat sink temperature

C079 Oscillation damping *

822X/824X 5 0

{0.02 %}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{1}

C088 Rated motor current

821X/822X/824X

C091 Motor cos j

821X/822X/824X

*

*

0.0 ... 1.2

k rated output current

0.4

{0.1}

820X

821X

822X/824X

820X

821X

822X

820X

821X

82 1x (Software 1x)

82 2x (Software 2x)

82 1x (Software 1x)

82 1x (Software 1x) 822X/824X

C105 Deceleration time

QSP

821X/822X/824X

C106 Holding time for autom. DC injection brake

5.00

0.00

820X 0.00

0.00

821X/822X

824X

0.02

0.00

{0.02 s}

{0.01 s}

{0.01 s}

821X/822X/

C111 ¤ Monitor signal

820X 220 0

128 0

824X

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

{1}

{1}

Field frequency

Unit load

Motor current

DC-bus voltage

Page 7-64

999.00

Page 7-55

Page 7-56

50.00

999.00

255

255

Page 7-69

Page 7-69

Info

40.00 Page 7-56

480.00 Page 7-43

480.00 Page 7-43

480.00 Page 7-43

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-31

80

Page 7-27

1.0

Page 7-27

Page 7-64

*depends on the unit

Display only

Display only [V]

Display only [A]

Display only [%]

Display only [°C]

* depends on the unit

Is not transferred when parameters via the operating module.

7-80

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C117 ¤ Function relay K2

822X/824X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation

-4Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5-

-6-

-7-

Field frequency f d f dset reached

Q min reached

= 0

-8-

-9-

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-10 • C)

-11PTC warning

C119 ¤ Function PTC

822X/824X -0-0PTC input not active

-1-

-2-

PTC input active, TRIP and pulse inhibit will be set

PTC input active

Warning

C120 I 2 k t switch-off

822X/824X 0 0 {1 %} 100

Info

Page 7-65 ff

Page 7-72

Page 7-71

C125 ¤ * LECOM baud rate

C142 ¤ Start condition

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

9600 baud

4800 baud

2400 baud

1200 baud

19200 baud

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit active

Page 7-49

-3-

C144 ¤ Chopper-frequency reduction

821X/822X/824X -1-0-

-1-

Page 7-29

C161* Current fault

C162* Last fault

C163* Last but one fault

C164* Last but two fault

C170 ¤ TRIP-reset selection

C171 Deceleration for

Auto-TRIP reset

C178* Operating time

0.00

-0-

-1-

0.00

No chopper-frequency lowering

Automatic chopper frequency reduction at J max

- 10 • C

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

Auto TRIP reset or TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

{0.01 s}

Page 8-4

60.00 Page 8-4

Page 7-64

If C120 = 0, the function is not active

Only for LECOM applications

Display only

8200SHB0199

7-81

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C179* Mains connection time

C377* ¤ Gain voltage detection

822X/824X

C500* Display factor

Application datum numerator

821X/822X/824X 2000 1

C501* Display factor for process variable denominator

821X/822X/824X 10 1

{1}

{1}

Info

Page 7-64 Display only

Should only be changed by the

Lenze Service!

Page 7-63

25000

Page 7-63

25000

7-82

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--D2

00406186

Manual

Part D2

Code table for the series

8210/20/40 HVAC (V020)

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7.9

Code table for “HVAC” series

Column

Code

Name

Lenze

Choice

Info

IMPORTANT

How to read the code table:

*

-

-

1

Abbreviation

C013

C009*

C001 ¤

[C002]

C010 œ

{1 %}

Meaning

-

-

-

Code C013

The parameter of the code can be different in PAR1 and PAR2.

The parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE).

The parameter value of the code is always the same in PAR1 and PAR2, but is always displayed in PAR1.

The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+ PRG.

The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+ PRG, but only if the controller is inhibited.

Parameter value of the code will only be displayed in [Hz], if C500 = 2000 and

C501 = 10 (factory setting). See chapter 7.6.3.

821X

Name of the code.

Controller-specific setting possibilities (here for 821X).

Without unit designation, the code is valid for all unit types.

Factory setting of the code

The column ”Important” contains further information.

99 Min. value {Steps/Unit}

Meaning of the code

Max. value

Additional, important explanation of the code

C001 ¤ Operating mode

[C002]* Parameter set

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via 8201BB or

LECOM

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via 8201BB

Setpoint selection via term. 8

Control via terminals

Parameter setting via LECOM

Setpoint selection via LECOM

Control via LECOM

Parameter setting via LECOM

Function executed

Overwrite PAR1 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR2 with factory setting

Overwrite PAR1 and PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR1 with the data of the operating module

Overwrite PAR2 with the data of the operating module

Transmit PAR1 and PAR2 to the operating module

Overwrite PAR1, PAR2 and the unit-dependent data (C016, C036,

C088, C091) with the data of the operating module

Info

Page 7-9,

7-42

Page 7-10

8200SHB0199

7-85

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C003 ¤ Save parameter set

C004

C005

C007

¤

¤

¤

Switch-on display

Configuration

Terminal configuration

Possible settings

Lenze

-1-

-0-

-0-

-0-

Choice

-0-

-1-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-0-

-1-

-2-

Data will not be saved on EEPROM; all data will be lost when switching off the mains

Data will be saved on EEPROM; setting when switching on the mains

Field frequency f d

Unit load

Motor current

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8 with setpoint summation via frequency input E1

Operation with open-loop control via frequency input E1 with setpoint summation via terminal 8

-3-

-6-

-7-

Open loop operation via frequency input E1 with limitation of the apparent motor current via terminal 8

Operation with closed-loop control; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

Operation with closed-loop control, setpoint via frequency input E1 with analog feedback via terminal 8

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

E4 E3

CW/CCW GSB

CW/CCW PAR

CW/CCW QSP

CW/CCW PAR

CW/CCW QSP

E2 E1

JOG1/2/3

JOG1/2/3

JOG1/2/3

GSB JOG1

PAR JOG1

CW/CCW GSB TRIP set JOG1

CW/CCW PAR TRIP set JOG1

CW/CCW PAR

CW/CCW QSP

GSB

PAR

TRIP set

TRIP set

-9CW/CCW QSP TRIP set JOG1

-10CW/CCWTRIP set UP DOWN

Info

Page 7-8

Page 7-62

Page 7-26,

7-61

C005 = -3with

C014 = -2-, -4possible

Page 7-10,

7-44, 7-46,

7-50, 7-54,

7-58,

-0- only valid for

C010, C011, C012,

C013, C037, C038,

C105, C181 and

C182

If C005 = -0-

2 ms cycle time

If C005 = -1- ... -7-

4 ms cycle time

C005 = -4-, -5- not applicable

R =

CW rotation

L =

CCW rotation

GSB =

DC-injection brake

PAR =

Parameter set changeover

JOG =

Fixed frequency

QSP =

Quick stop

7-86

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C007 ¤ Terminal configuration

(continued)

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

E4 E3

-11CW/CCW GSB

-12CW/CCW PAR

-13CW/CCW QSP

E2

UP

UP

UP

E1

DOWN

DOWN

DOWN

-14CCW/QSPCW/QSP GSB JOG1

-15CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR JOG1

-16CCW/QSPCW/QSP JOG1/2/3

-17CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR GSB

-18CCW/QSPCW/QSP PAR TRIP set

-19CCW/QSPCW/QSP GSB TRIP set

-20CCW/QSPCW/QSPTRIP set JOG1

-21CCW/QSPCW/QSP UP DOWN

-22CCW/QSPCW/QSP UP JOG1

-23H/Re CW/CCW UP DOWN

-24H/Re

-25H/Re

PAR

GSB

UP DOWN

UP DOWN

-26H/Re JOG1 UP DOWN

-27H/Re TRIP set UP DOWN

-28JOG1/2/3 I-OFF

-29JOG1 GSB I-OFF

-30JOG1 QSP I-OFF

-31GSB QSP I-OFF

-32TRIP set QSP I-OFF

-33QSP PAR I-OFF

-34CCW/QSPCW/QSP I-OFF

-35JOG1/2/3

-36GSB QSP

PAR

PAR

D/F

D/F

-37JOG1 QSP PAR D/F

-38JOG1 PAR TRIP set D/F

-39JOG1/2/3 TRIP set D/F

-40JOG1 QSP TRIP set D/F

-41JOG1 GSB TRIP set D/F

-42QSP GSB TRIP set D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

-43CW/CCW QSP TRIP set D/F

-44UP DOWN PAR D/F

-45CW/CCW QSP

-46H/Re PAR

PAR

QSP

D/F

JOG1

-47CW/QSPCCW/QSP H/Re JOG1

-48INFL_0 GSB I-OFF

-49INFL_0 JOG1 QSP

-50INFL_0 JOG1 I-OFF

-51GSB PAR I-OFF

D/F

D/F

D/F

D/F

Info

TRIP Set =

External fault

UP/DOWN =

Motor potentiometer functions

H/Re =

Manual/remote changeover

I-OFF =

Reset of the

I-component of the

PID controller

D/F =

Digital frequency input 0 - 10 kHz

EINFL_0 =

Set the influence of the PID controller to

0

For parameter set changeover via terminals, the corresponding terminal must be assigned with PAR in both parameter sets.

8200SHB0199

7-87

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C008

C009*

¤

¤

Function relay K1

822X/824X

822X/824X

Device address

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

Motor is running / CW rotation

-4Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5-

-6-

Field frequency f d

= 0 f dset reached

-7-

-8-

-9-

Q min reached

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10 • C)

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-11PTC warning

-12Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156

-13Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold C156 and f d

> Q min threshold (C017)

-14Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156 and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

1

-15Warning motor phase failure

-16f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

1 {1} 99

Info

Page 7-65

C010 œ Minimum field frequency

C011 œ Maximum field frequency

C012 Acceleration time T ir

C013 Deceleration time T if

0.00

50.00

7.50

5.00

5.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

C014 ¤ Control mode -4-2-

C016 V min setting

C017 œ Threshold Q min

C018 ¤ Chopper frequency

*

0.00

-1-

-4-

C015 V/f rated frequency 50.00

7.50

0.00

0.00

-0-

-1-

-2-

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 s}

{0.02 s}

Motor-current control

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 %}

{0.02 Hz}

4 kHz power-loss optimised

8 kHz, power-loss optimised

12 kHz power-loss optimised

480.00 Page 7-15

480.00 Page 7-15

1300.00 Page 7-16

1300.00 Page 7-16,

7-55

Linear characteristic V f d constant V min boost with d

2

Page 7-19,

7-22, 7-24

960.00 Page 7-22

40.00 Page 7-24

480.00 Page 7-65

Page 7-29

Only for LECOM applications

*depends on the unit

C019 œ Threshold auto DC brake

-5-

-6-

-7-

0.10

0.00

8 kHz noise optimised

12 kHz noise optimised

16 kHz noise optimised

{0.02 Hz} 5.00 Page 7-56

7-88

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C022 I max limit

(motor mode)

C023 I max limit

(generator mode)

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

0.0* -50.0

0.0

0.0

150 30

80 30

{0.1 %}

{1 %}

{1 %}

Info

20.0

150 Page 7-17

150 Page 7-17

If C014 = -4-

C026 Offset adjustment analog input

0.00

-10.00

{0.01 V} 10.00 Page 7-40

The current-limit controller for operation in generator mode is not active at 30 %.

C026 < 0 V

f dmin

C010 can fall below the value set under

C027 Scaling factor of

C034 ¤ analog input

Master current

C035* ¤ Selection DC brake

100.0

-200.0

-0-

*

-0-

-1-

-0-0-

-1-

0.00

{0.1 %} 200.0 Page 7-40

0 to 20 mA /

0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA

Page 7-40

Selection of brake voltage under

C036

Selection of brake current under

C036

{0.02 %}

Page 7-56

150.00 Page 7-56

20.00

-480.00

{0.02 Hz} 480.00 Page 7-43

C036 Voltage/current for

DCB

C037 œ JOG value 1

C038 œ JOG value 2

C039 œ JOG value 3

C040 Controller enable

30.00

40.00

-480.00

-480.00

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

480.00 Page 7-43

480.00 Page 7-43

Page 7-62

C043 TRIP reset

C046 œ Frequency setpoint

* -0-

-1-

Controller inhibited

Controller enabled

* -0-

-1-

* -480.00

No current fault

Current fault

{0.02 %} 480.00 Page 7-62

C047* Current setpoint

I max limit value

C049* œ Additional setpoint

C050* œ Output frequency

C051* œ Actual PID controller value

C052* Motor voltage

C053* DC-bus voltage

C054* Motor current

C056* Unit load

C061* Heat sink temperature

Page 7-62

Page 7-47,

7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-34,

7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

Page 7-62,

7-65

Page 7-62

Page 7-62

*depends on the unit

*see Operating

Display only [%]

I max limit value (C022)

Display only

Only if C005 = 1, 2

Display only [A]

Display only [%]

Display only [°C]

8200SHB0199

7-89

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C070 Gain PID controller

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

1.00

0.00

{0.01}

C071 Integral action time

PID controller

C072 Differential component of PID controller

100

0.0

10

0.0

{0.1}

C074 Influence PID controller

C077* Gain I max controller

C078* Integral action time

I max controller

0.0

0.25

65

*

822X/824X 5

0.0

0.00

12

0

C088 Rated motor current

C091 Motor cos j

{0.1 %}

{0.01}

{1 ms}

{1}

* 0 {1 A}

0.0 ... 2.0

k rated output current

*

0.4

{0.1}

821X

822X

824X

C099* Software version

C105 Deceleration time

QSP

C106 Holding time for autom. DC injection brake

C108* Gain (C111)

5.00

0.00

0.02

0.00

128

821X

822X

824X

82 3x

0

(Software 3x)

{0.02 s}

{0.01 s}

{1}

Info

300.00 Page 7-34

9999 Page 7-34

5.0 Page 7-34

100.0 Page 7-34

1.00 Page 7-18

9990 Page 7-18

80

480

1.0

Page 7-31

Page 7-27

Page 7-27

Page 7-64

Page 7-64

Page 7-55

1300.00

999.00 Page 7-56

255 Page 7-69

0.0 = P-component not active

9999 = I-component not active

0.0 = D-component not active

*depends on the unit

7-90

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C111

C114

¤

¤

Monitor signal

Signal level digital inputs

822X/824X

822X/824X

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

Field frequency

Unit load

Motor current

DC-bus voltage

Motor power

Motor voltage

Analog output 1/f d

(1/C050)

Field frequency of f dmin

(C010) ... f dmax

(C011)

Actual PID controller value

-0-

-9Ready for operation

-10TRIP fault message

-11Motor is running

-12Motor is running / CW rotation

-13Motor is running / CCW rotation

-14Field frequency f d

= 0

-15f dset

-16Q min reached reached

-17I max reached

-18Overtemperature ( Ô max

-10 • )

-19TRIP, Q min or IMP set

-20PTC warning

-21Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold (C156)

-22Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold (C156) and f d

> Q min threshold

-23Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold (C156) and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-24Warning motor phase failure

-25f d

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

-0-

E4

0

E3

0

E2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

-8-

-9-

-101

1

1

-111

-121

-131

-141

-151

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

E1

0

1

Info

Page 7-69

Page 7-52

Selection -9- ... -25corresponds to the relay output functions

C008 and C117:

-

-

LOW = 0 V

HIGH = 10 V

0: Ex is not inverted

1: Ex is inverted

8200SHB0199

7-91

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Possible settings

C115 ¤ Priority mask digital inputs

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-4-

-5-

-6-

-7-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-8-

-9-

-101

-111

1

1

-121

-131

-141

-151

0

0

0

0

0

0

E4

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

E3

0

0

0

0

C117 ¤ Function relay K2

822X/824X

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

Ready for operation

TRIP fault message

Motor is running

-3-

-4-

Motor is running / CW rotation

Motor is running / CCW rotation

-5-

-6-

-7-

-8-

-9f

Field frequency f d dset reached

= 0

Q min reached

I max reached

Overtemperature ( J max

-10 • C)

-10TRIP or Q min or IMP

-11PTC warning

-12Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156

-13Apparent motor current

(C054) < current threshold C156 and f d

> Q min threshold (C017)

-14Apparent motor current

(C054) < threshold C156 and input of ramp function generator = output of ramp function generator

822X/824X -15Warning motor phase failure

-16f d

C119 ¤ Function PTC

822X/824X -0-0-

(C050) < f dmin

(C010)

PTC input not active

-1-

-2-

PTC input active, TRIP and pulse inhibit will be set

PTC input active

Warning

C120 2 k t switch-off

822X/824X 0 0 {1 %} 100

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

E2

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

E1

0

1

0

1

Info

Page 7-53

Page 7-65 ff

Page 7-72

Page 7-71

0: Function Ex depends on C001

1: Function Ex is independent of C001

Ctrl. inhibit and TRIP reset always have first priority.

With -0- also TRIP set and QSP have priority.

If C120 = 0, the function is not active

7-92

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C125 ¤ * LECOM baud rate

C126* Selection of communication fault

C127 Choice

Set-value input

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

-0-0-

-0-

-1-

-0-

-1-

9600 baud

4800 baud

2400 baud

1200 baud

19200 baud

No TRIP when stopping the communication in the process channel

TRIP (-CEO-) when stopping the communication in the process channel

Absolute setpoint selection in Hz via

C046 or process channel

Normalised setpoint selection via

C141 (0 ... 100 %) or process channel ( – 16384 = f dmax

(C011))

Info

C135* Control word

-100.00

{0.01 %} 100.00

C141* Standardised setpoint

C142 ¤ Start condition

C144 ¤ Chopper frequency reduction

-1-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-1-0-

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit not active

Automatic start inhibited, flying-restart circuit active

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit active

No chopper-frequency reduction

Automatic chopper frequency reduction at J max

- 10 • C

Page 7-49

Page 7-29

C150* Status word

C156* Current threshold

C161* Actual fault

C162* Last fault

C163* Last but one fault

C164* Last but two fault

C170 ¤ TRIP-reset selection

0 0

-0-

-1-

0.00

0.00

{1 %} 150 Page 7-65

E.g. with belt monitoring

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

Page 8-2

TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

Auto TRIP reset or TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

{0.01 s}

Page 8-4

60.00 Page 8-4 C171 Deceleration for

Auto-TRIP reset

C178* Operating time

C179* Mains connection time

C181* œ Setpoint PID controller

0.00

-480.00

{0.02 Hz}

Page 7-64

Page 7-64

480.00 Page 7-34,

7-38

Only for LECOM applications

See Operating

Instructions 2102

Only for bus operation

Only when C127 = 1 active

See Operating

Instructions 2102

Only with C181 0 active

8200SHB0199

7-93

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

C182* Integration time ramp function generator S-shape

Possible settings

Lenze

0.00

Choice

0.00

{0.01 s}

Info

50.00 Page 7-32 C182 = 0.00

- Linear ramp function generator

C182 > 0.00

- Ramp function generator S shape with

T i time = C182

C196* ¤ Input condition autom. DC injection brake

C200 Software EKZ

C238 ¤ Frequency precontrol

C239 ¤ Frequency setting range

C304 Password1

C305 Password2

C307 Contents of the address

C308 Address

C377* ¤ Gain voltage detection

822X/824X

C395 LWORD process input data

C396 LWORD process output data

C425 ¤ * Adjustment of digital frequency

-0-

-1-

-0-

-0-

-1-

-0-

-1-

-0-

-1-

DC brake active at C050 < C019

DC brake active at C050 < C019

and Setpoint < C019

No precontrol

With setpoint precontrol

Bipolar

Unipolar

Page 7-56

Page 7-34,

7-39

Page 7-39

-2-

-0-

-1-

-2-

-3-

-4-

100 -200.0

Dig.ResoScannMax.freq.

lution ing freq.

100 Hz 1/200 1 s 300 Hz

1 kHz 1/200 100 ms 3 kHz

10 kHz 1/200 10 ms 10 kHz

10 kHz 1/1000 50 ms 10 kHz

10 kHz 1/10000 500 ms 10 kHz

{0.1 %}

Page 7-60

200.0 Page 7-60 C426* Gain adjustment frequency input E1

C427 Offset adjustment frequency input E1

C500* Display factor numerator

C501* Display factor for

0.0

2000

10

-12.5

1

1

{0.1 %}

{1}

{1}

12.5 Page 7-60

25000 Page 7-63

25000 Page 7-63 denominator

C597* ¤ Activation of motor phase failure detection

822X/824X -0-0-

-1-

-2-

Inactive

TRIP

Warning

Page 7-73

Should only be

When using the analog input module

9279 for the frequency input E1:

Set C425 to 2, 3 or 4

7-94

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

C599* ¤ Current limit value

Motor phase failure detection

822X/824X 5

C625* œ Skip frequency 1

1

480.00 0.00

C626* œ Skip frequency 2

C627* œ Skip frequency 3

480.00 0.00

480.00 0.00

C628* Bandwidth of skip frequencies

C988* DC-bus voltage threshold for DC-bus voltage control

0.00

0.00

0 0

{1 %}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.02 Hz}

{0.01 %}

{1 %}

Info

Page 7-73

50

480.00 Page 7-33

480.00 Page 7-33

480.00 Page 7-33

100.00 Page 7-33

200 Page 7-12 C988 = 0 %

- No parameter set changeover via

DC-bus voltage

C988 = 1 ... 200 %

- Parameter set changeover via

DC-bus voltage is active

Parameter set changeover via terminal or LECOM is not possible with

C988 > 0!

8200SHB0199

7-95

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Configuration

7-96

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--E

00406187

Manual

Part E

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Maintenance

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Occuring faults can be easily recognized through the display elements or status information (chapter 8.1).

The faults can be analysed with the history buffer (chapter 8.2) and the list in chapter 8.3, which helps you to eliminate the faults.

8.1

Troubleshooting

8.1.1

Display at the controller

During operation without operating module, two LEDs at the front indicate the operating status of the controller.

LED green red on on off on blinking off off blinking every second off off blinking every 0.4 seconds off

Controller enabled

Mains switched on, automatic start inhibited (AS_LC)

Controller inhibited

Fault message, check under C161

Undervoltage switch-off

Programming mode (only 820X)

8.1.2

Display at the operating module

Status message in the display indicate the controller status.

Display

OV

UV

IMAX

TEMP

Meaning

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

Set current limit exceeded

Heat sink temperature near switch-off limit

8200SHB0199

8-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

8.1.3

Maloperation of the drive

Maloperation Possible causes

Motor does not rotate DC-bus voltage too low

(Red LED is blinking every 0.4 seconds, message LU is indicated)

Controller inhibited

(Green LED is blinking, display of the operating module: OFF, STOP or AS_LC)

Motor does not rotate smoothly

Current consumption of motor too high

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Setpoint = 0

DC braking active

Quick-stop function active

JOG setpoint activated and JOG frequency = 0

Fault message is displayed (see chapter 8.3)

Mechanical motor brake is not released

Defective motor cable

Maximum current C022 and C023 too low

Motor underexcited or overexcited (check parameter setting)

Setting of C016 too high

Setting of C015 too low

C088 and C091 are not adapted to the motor data

8.2

Fault analysis with the history buffer

The history buffer is used to trace faults. The fault messages are stored in the history buffer in the order of their occurrence.

The memory locations can be retrieved via the codes.

Structure of the history buffer

Code Memory unit

C161 Memory unit 1

C162 Memory unit 2

C163 Memory unit 3

C164 Memory unit 4

Entry

Active fault

Last fault

Last but one fault

Last but two fault

Note

If the fault is no longer active or has been acknowledged:

-

Memory location 1 will be deleted (= no active fault).

8.3

Display

---

EEr

H05

LP1

LU

Fault messages

Fault

No fault

External fault (TRIP-Set)

Internal fault

Motor phase failure

Undervoltage

-

Cause

A digital input assigned to the TRIP-Set function has been activated.

-

Remedy

Check external encoder

- Failure of one or several motor phases

- Motor current too low

DC-bus voltage too low

Short-circuit

Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor cable

Contact Lenze

Check motor cables, check V min setting, connect motor with corresponding power or adapt motor under C599.

-

-

Check mains voltage

Check supply module

Find out cause of short circuit; check cable

Use shorter motor cables or cables with less capacitance

8-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

OUE

Pr

Pr1

Pr2 rSt

Display

OC3

OC4

OC5

OC6

OH

OH3

OH4

Fault

Overload inverter during acceleration or short circuit

Cause

Grounded motor phase

Excessive capacitive charging current of the motor cable

Acceleration time too short (C012)

Overload controller during deceleration

Defective motor cable

Interturn fault in the motor

Deceleration time too short (C013)

Remedy

Check motor; check cable

Use motor cable which is shorter or has a lower capacitance

-

-

Increase acceleration time

Check drive selection

Check wiring

Check motor

-

-

Increase deceleration time

Check the selection of the brake resistor or connect the brake chopper

Check drive selection I x t overload

Overload motor

Heat sink temperature is higher than the value set in the controller

Frequent and too long acceleration processes with overcurrent

Permanent overload with

I motor

> 1.05 x I rx

Motor is thermally overloaded, for instance, because of

-

impermissible continuous current frequent or too long acceleration processes

Ambient temperature

T amb

> + 40 • C or + 50 • C

PTC monitoring

Heat sink very dirty

Incorrect mounting position

Motor too hot because of excessive currents or frequent and too long accelerations

PTC not connected

-

-

-

-

Check drive selection

Check the setting under C120

Allow controller to cool and ensure ventilation

Check the ambient temperature in the control cabinet

Clean heat sink

Change mounting position

Check drive selection

Overtemperature unit Inside unit too hot

Mains voltage too high

Feedback operation

Braking operation

Earth leakage on the motor side

Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring

(C0585 = 3)

-

-

-

Reduce controller load

Improve cooling

Check fan in the controller

Check voltage supply

-

-

Prolong deceleration times

For operation with brake choppers:

- Check the selection and connection of the brake resistor

- Increase the deceleration times

Check motor cable and motor for earth fault

(disconnect motor from inverter)

Check mains voltage Overvoltage

Faulty parameter transfer via the operating module

Faulty PAR1 transfer via the operating module

Faulty PAR2 transfer via the operating module

Faulty auto-TRIP reset

Mains overvoltage longer than 5 s

PAR1 and PAR2 are defective

PAR1 is defective

PAR2 is defective

More than 8 fault messages in

10 minutes transfer or load the factory setting before

Depends on the fault message

8200SHB0199

8-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Troubleshooting and fault elimination

8.4

Reset of fault messages

TRIP

After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit will only be reset after the acknowledgement of TRIP.

Note!

If the TRIP source is still active, the TRIP cannot be reset.

C170 ¤ TRIP-reset selection

C171 Deceleration for

Auto-TRIP reset

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-

0.00

-1-

0.00

TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

Auto-TRIP reset or TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus

{0.01 s} 60.00

Info

Function

Activation

Important

You can select whether the fault is to be reset automatically or manually.

Auto-TRIP reset does not reset all faults automatically.

C170 = -0-:

TRIP reset (fieldbus)

-

-

STP key

LOW signal at terminal 28

-

-

-

-

C170 = -1-:

Auto-TRIP reset resets all faults after the time set under C171.

TRIP reset (fieldbus)

STP key

LOW signal at terminal 28

-

-

Mains switching always resets TRIP.

With more than 8 auto-TRIP resets within 10 minutes (internal counter), the controller sets TRIP and indicates rST (counter exceeded).

- With TRIP reset by pressing the STP key or LOW signal at ctrl. enable or fieldbus, the controller resets the internal counter.

8-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Maintenance

9 Maintenance

9.1

Maintenance services

-

The controller is free of maintenance, if the prescribed conditions are observed (see chapter 3.3).

-

If the ambient air is polluted, the air vents of the controller may be obstructed.

- Check the air vents periodically (depending on the degree of pollution approx. every 4 weeks).

- Free the obstructed air vents using a vacuum cleaner.

Stop!

Do not use sharp or pointed tools, such as knives or screwdrivers, to clean the air vents.

8200SHB0199

9-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Maintenance

9.2

Service addresses

The addresses of your Lenze world-wide representatives are listed on the back cover of every Lenze publication.

9-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--F

00406188

Manual

Part F

Network of several drives

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10 Network of several drives

10.1

Function

-

A DC-bus network of controllers enables the energy exchange between the connected controllers on the DC-voltage level.

-

If one or more controllers operate in generator mode (braking), the recovered energy will be fed into the shared DC-voltage bus or the DC source. The energy will then be available in the network of controllers which operate in motor mode.

-

The energy from the three-phase AC mains can be supplied as follows:

- Central supply via a 934X supply and feedback module.

- Decentral supply by connecting several controllers of the network to the mains.

-

The use of brake units, supply units and the energy consumption from the three-phase AC mains can be reduced.

-

The number of mains supplies can be perfectly adapted to your application.

8200SHB0199

10-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.2

Conditions for trouble-free network operation

Stop!

-

The installation and assembly notes must be applied (chapter 4).

-

Connect controllers only when they have similar DC-bus/mains-voltage ranges (see the following table).

-

Adapt the thresholds of brake units and input and feedback modules.

-

All supplies should only be operated with the prescribed mains chokes/mains filters! (See page 10-11)

10.2.1

Possible combinations

Type

820X **)

821X

822X

824X

93XX

Possible combinations of Lenze controllers in DC-bus connection:

821X 822X 824X

Data 820X

➀ 1 / N / PE / AC / 190 ... 260 V á 0 % / 50 Hz/60 Hz

270 V ... 360 V

375 V

93XX

3 / PE / AC / 320 ... 510 V á 0 % / 50 Hz/60 Hz

450 V ... 715 V

725 V *)

3 / PE / AC / 320 ... 528 V á 0 % / 50 Hz/60 Hz

460 V ... 740 V

725/765 V *)

3 / PE / AC / 320 ... 528 V á 0 % / 50 Hz/60 Hz

460 V ... 740 V

725/765 V *)

3 / PE / AC / 320 ... 528 V á 0 % / 50 Hz/60 Hz

460 V ... 740 V

725/765 V *)

Max. permissible mains-voltage range

DC-bus voltage range

Operating threshold - brake unit

*) Set the thresholds of all units connected to the DC-bus to the same value.

Procedure: See the corresponding Operating Instructions.

**) Central supply only possible from a DC source

10-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.2.2

Mains connection

10.2.2.1 Cable protection/cable cross-section

Mains fuses and cable cross-section of the mains cables must be selected according to the mains current which results from the input power P

DC100

%

. Observe national standards, temperatures and other conditions.

-

Rule of thumb for the mains current in networks:

,

PDLQV

>$@

3

'&

ô

9

PDLQV

See page 10-10.

10.2.2.2 Mains choke/mains filter

-

Use the mains chokes/mains filters assigned to the network operation.

Function:

- Mains-current limitation

- Current/power symmetry of the mains input circuits of the controllers in decentral network operation.

Mains choke/mains filter must be selected according to the mains current and the required radio interference suppression (see page 10-11).

10.2.2.3 Controller protection

Switch-on conditions

-

Ensure simultaneous mains connection of all controller connected to the network.

Mains-failure detection at the controller when selecting decentral supply

-

Monitoring of the mains supply of each controller:

- In the event of failure, the controllers still connected to the mains can be overloaded.

-

Measure:

- Switch-off the whole drive network, if a mains supply fails.

-

Possibilities for detecting/indicating mains failures:

- Application of mains fuses with alarm contact.

- Application of thermal overcurrent releases (bimetall relay), which is connected after the mains fuses.

- Application of power switches with thermal and magnetic releases as well as integrated alarm contact to protect the cable.

8200SHB0199

10-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.2.3

DC-bus connection

Use short cable connections to the shared DC-bus star point.

-

Cross-section of the DC-bus connection cable

á

U

G

↔ DC-bus

- must be selected according to the fuses F1 ... F3 of the corresponding controller and the local conditions.

-

Cable cross-section of the DC-bus

- must be selected according to the sum of the mains supplies in the

DC-bus (see chapter 10.2.4).

-

Example:

Mains

3 AC / PE / xxx V / xx Hz

F1 ... F3

3 x 16A

DC bus

F4, F5

3 x 50A 3 x 125A

Controller 1 Controler 2 Controller 3

M M M

FIG 10-1 Example for the rating of the cable cross-section of the DC-bus

- Sum of the possible permanent r.m.s. currents of the parallel mains supplies: 16 A + 50 A + 125 A = 191 A

- The cable cross-section is selected according to the resulting current of

191 A and the local conditions, as for instance, ambient temperature, conductor material, conductor type, type of laying, expansion, standards, and regulations.

-

Ensure smallest possible line inductivity by selecting the corresponding type of installation:

- DC-bus star point in control cabinet above parallel busbar.

- Cables between controller (connections +U

G point must be in parallel or twisted.

and -U

G

) and DC-bus start

10-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

-

Use the assigned DC-bus fuses F4, F5.

(For protection, see chapter 10.2.5).

The controller is protected by the two-pole, type-dependent protection of the controller and the DC-bus against:

- internal short circuit,

- internal earth fault,

- a short circuit +U

G

- an earth fault via +U

G

-U

G on the DC-bus,

PE or -U

G

PE.

Note!

-

With only two controllers connected to the network, one fuse pair F4/F5 is sufficient.

- The rating must be made taking into account the weakest controller.

-

Connect an additional fuse pair F4/F5 before each controller, if more than two controllers are connected to the DC-bus.

8200SHB0199

10-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.2.4

Fuses and cable cross-sections for a network of several drives

The table values are valid for the operation of 821X/822X/824X controller in

DC-bus operation with PDC100 %, i.e. use of the max. rated controller power on the DC-bus level (see page 10-10).

For operation with reduced power, it is possible to select smaller fuses and cable cross-sections.

Type 821X/822X/824X: Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE

Operation with mains filter/mains choke

E.l.c.b.

Cable cross-section 1) Fuse

F1, F2, F3

VDE

8211 M 6A

8212 M 6A

8213 M 10A

8214 M 10A

8215 M 16A

8216 M 16A

8217 M 32A

8218 M 32A

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

UL VDE

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 10A

B 13A

B 16A

B 32A

B 32A mm 2

1

1

1.5

1.5

2.5

2.5

6

6

13

13

10

10

AWG

17

17

15

15

Fuse

F4, F5

16A

20A

40A

40A

6.3A

6.3A

12A

12A

DC input + V

DC

, -V

DC

, PE

Cable cross-section 1)

2.5

4

6

6 mm 2

1

1

1.5

1.5

13

11

10

10

AWG

17

17

15

15

8221 M 50A

8222 M 80A

8223 M 80A

8224 M 125A

8225 M 125A

8226 M 160A

8227 M 200A

50A

80A

80A

125A

125A

175A

200A -

-

-

-

-

-

-

16

25

25

70

70

95

120

5

3

3

2/0

2/0

3/0

4/0

8241 M 6A

8242 M 6A

8243 M 10A

8244 M 10A

8245 M 16A

8246 M 32A

5A

5A

10A

10A

20A

25A

B 6A

B 6A

B 10A

B 10A

B 16A

B 32A

1

1

1.5

1.5

2.5

6

17

17

15

15

13

10

1)

2)

Observe national and regional regulations (e.g. VDE/EVU)!

F4, F5 are possible because of parallel fuse connection.

Parallel connection cables can be used accordingly.

6.3A

6.3A

12A

12A

20A

40A

80A

100A

100A

2x 100A 2)

2x 100A 2)

3x 80A 2)

3x 100A 2)

4

6

1

1

1.5

1.5

16

25

25

7

5

3

2x 25 (1x 70) 2x 3 (1x 2/0)

2x 25 (1x 70) 2x 3 (1x 2/0)

3x 16 (1x 95) 3x 5 (1x 3/0)

3x 25 (1x 120) 3x 3 (1x 4/0)

17

17

15

15

11

10

10-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.2.5

Protection in networks of several drives

You have the possibility of selecting a graded protection concept for network operation. The damage risk depends on the type of protection. The following table helps to analyse the risk.

Please note:

-

The rating of the cable cross-section of the common DC-bus must be appropriate for the sum of parallel mains supplies:

- The sum of the rated fuse currents is the rated value for the cross-section of the busbars.

- Observe the local standards and regulations.

-

On the motor side, the cable protection is supported by the current limitation of the controller. Condition:

- The current limit set for the controller corresponds to the rated current of the connected motor.

- For group drives, additional protection of the single drives is required/recommended.

Definition: ”internal fault”

-

Controllers:

- The fault is located between the connection point at the DC-bus and inside the unit in front of the terminals U, V, W.

-

Supply modules:

- The fault is located between the mains input (terminals L1, L2, L3) and the farthest point of the DC-bus.

Protection by

Protection of

Possible faults

Risk

Note

F1 ... F3

-

-

-

Cable protection on the mains side on the DC-bus on the motor side

No unit protection

One or more controllers with

- internal short circuit (+ U

G

- internal earth fault (+ U

G

-U

G

PE/-U

- motor-side earth fault on phase W

)

G

→ PE)

Mains failure of a controller with decentral supply.

Several parallel controllers supply the fault location(s) via the

DC-bus. This may lead to overload of the intact controller, as the faulty controller is not selectively activated on the DC-bus.

Possible damage with central and decentral supply

- destruction of the controller concerned

- destruction of the controllers still intact

- destruction of the supply unit

If a mains-side supply/input fails because F1 ... F3 blows, the active controller which is connected can be overloaded.

The extent of destructions depends on the ratio ”DC-bus power of the whole system / rated power of the controller concerned”.

8200SHB0199

10-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

Protection by

Protection of

Possible faults

Risk

Note

Protection by

Protection of

Possible faults

Risk

Note

-

-

Cable protection on the mains side

on the DC-bus on the motor side

Unit protection in the event of overload

F1 ... F3 with alarm contact

No unit protection in the event of short circuit

If a supply/input fails because F1 ... F3 blows, the remaining controllers which are connected will not be overloaded as the alarm contact switches off the mains and thus the whole network.

One or more controllers with

- internal short circuit (+ U

G

→ -U

G

)

- internal earth fault (+ U

G

→ PE/-U

- motor-side earth fault on phase W

G

→ PE)

Several parallel controllers supply the fault location(s) via the DC-bus. This may lead to overload of the intact controller, as the faulty controller is not selectively activated on the DC-bus.

Possible damage with central and decentral supply

- destruction of the controller concerned

- destruction of the controllers still intact

- destruction of the supply unit

The extent of the destructions depends on the ratio ”DC-bus power of the whole system / rated power of the controller concerned”.

Cable protection

-

-

on the mains side on the DC-bus on the motor side

F1 ... F3 with alarm contact + F4 ... F5

Unit protection in the event of overload

If a supply/input fails because F1...F3

blows, the remaining controllers which are connected will not be overloaded as the alarm contact switches off the mains and thus the whole network.

Unit protection in the event of short circuit

One or more controllers with

- internal short circuit (+ U

G

→ -U

G

)

- internal earth fault (+ U

G

→ PE/-U

- motor-side earth fault on phase W

G

-

-

Possible damage with central supply

- destruction of the controller concerned

Possible damage with decentral supply

- destruction of the controller concerned

PE)

The selective activation of the mains and DC side reduces the extent of destruction.

10-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.3

Selection basics

In the following table you will find some basic data to select a drive network. Two examples explain the use of the tables.

10.3.1

Conditions

The unit data list in the table TAB 1 are only valid, if the network fulfills the following conditions:

-

All inputs are connected to the three-phase AC mains by means of the mains filters prescribed in TAB 2.

-

Chopper frequencies:

- 93XX: 8 kHz.

- 821X/822X/824X: 4 kHz or 8 kHz.

-

Motors (three-phase AC asynchronous motors, asynchronous servo motor, synchronous servo motors):

- Simultaneity factor F g

100 % motor load.

= 1, i.e. all motors operate simultaneously with

- Mains voltage V mains

= 400 V / 50 Hz

- Ambient temperature during operation: max. +40

E

C

8200SHB0199

10-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

Supply power in network operation

First input with type

9341 9342 9343 9330

8224

9322

8242 loss P

0.1

0.2

0.4

1.1

0.06

5

8211 8212 8215 9326

8246

8218

8217 9328

8222

8213 8214 9329

8223

9323

8243

9325

8245

8216

9327

8221

9324

8244

9321

8241

55 5 0.36

0.28 0.64

0.09 0.1

0.81

0.1

0.21

0.21

0.43

0.15 0.05

P

DC100 %

[kW]

8.3

16.6 31.2 51.8

2 2 2 6.2

13 13 32.7

4.1

4.1

34.5

4.2

7.2

28 4.6

2.7

9322,

8242

8211

8212

8215

8326,

8246,

8218

8217

9328,

8222

8213

8214

9329,

8223

9323,

8243

9325,

8245,

8216

9327,

8221

9324,

8244

9321,

8241

Further inputs with type

9341

9342

9343

9330,

8224

22.9

33.5 39.3 42.4

0.9

1.3

1.5

1.6

1.6

0.9

1.3

1.5

1.6

1.6

1.6

0.9

1.3

1.5

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

2.6

3.8

4.5

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

5.1

5.2

7.6

8.9

9.6

9.7

9.7

9.7

10.2 10.6

5.2

7.6

8.9

9.6

9.7

9.7

9.7

10.2 10.6 10.6

12.9

19 22.3 24 24.3 24.3 24.3

25.4 26.6 26.6 26.8

1.6

2.3

2.7

2.9

2.9

2.9

2.9

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.4

1.6

2.3

2.7

2.9

2.9

2.9

2.9

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.4

3.4

13 19 22.3 24 24.3 24.3 24.3

25.4 26.6 26.6 26.8

27.9 27.9 28.2

1.5

2.3

2.7

2.9

2.9

2.9

2.9

3

2.6

3.8

4.5

4.8

4.9

4.9

4.9

5.1

5.3

5.3

5.4

5.6

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9

9.7

14.3 16.7 18 18.2 18.2 18.2

19 20 20 20.1

20.9 20.9 21.2

21.6 22.1 22.9

1.5

2.3

2.7

2.9

2.9

2.9

2.9

3

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.4

3.4

3.2

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.4

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.8

0.9

1.3

1.5

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.8

1.8

1.9

1.9

1.9

1.9

2 2 2.1

2.2

TAB 1 Supply power in DC-bus connection

10-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

Filter assignment in network operation

Input with type

9341 9342 9343 9330

8224

9322

8242

8211 8212 8215 9326

8246

8218

Filter inductivity

[mH]

1.2

0.88

0.55

0.34

9 9 9 3

8217 9328

8222

1.5

1.5

0.6

5

8213 8214 9329

8223

5 0.6

5

9323

8243

4 4 13 24 24 54 7 7 54 7 Filter current

[A]

Order No.

17 35 55 100 4

9325

8245

8216

9327

8221

9324

8244

9321

8241

3 0.8

5

13 42 7

9

4

TAB 2 Prescribed mains filters for the supply in network operation

8200SHB0199

10-11

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.3.2

Selection example for 4 drives

10.3.2.1 Supply only via controllers

Drive data

Drive

Drive 1

Drive 2

Drive 3

Drive 4

Controller type

9328

9325

8214

8212

1. Determine DC-power requirements:

3

'&

- Power loss P loss

Æ

3

0L

®

L

3

9L

É

TAB 1.

Motor P

M

22 kW

5.5 kW

3.0 kW

1.5 kW

Efficiency h = 0.9

3

'&

3

'&

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

2. Determine first input:

- P

DC100%

TAB 1.

P

DC100%

9328

32.7 kW

9325

7.2 kW

8214

4.1 kW

8212

2.0 kW

- First input selected is 9328.

- Additionally required input powers are:

34.573 kW - 32.7 kW = 1.875 kW

3. Determine the second input:

- Input power for 9325/8214/8212 from ”9328/8222” in TAB 1.

P

DC2

9325

5.4 kW

8214

3.2 kW

8212 not possible

- The power of 8214 is not sufficient.

4. Result:

- This drive network must be connected to the three-phase AC mains via the controllers 9328 and 8214.

10-12

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.3.2.2 Supply by means of 934X supply and feedback module

The same drive is to be additionally equipped with 934X.

Drive data

Drive

Drive 1

Drive 2

Drive 3

Drive 4

Controller type

9328

9325

8214

8212

Motor P

M

22 kW

5.5 kW

3.0 kW

1.5 kW

Efficiency h = 0.9

1. Determine DC-power requirements:

- Power loss P loss

3

'&

L

Æ

3

0L

®

3

9L

É

from TAB 1.

3

'&

3

'&

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

N:

2. Determine the required supply module:

Input

Powers

P

DC

P

V934X

P

DCtotal

P

DC100%934X

9341

34.575 kW

0.1 kW

34.675 kW

8.3 kW

9342

34.575 kW

0.2 kW

34.775 kW

16.6 kW

9343

34.575 kW

0.4 kW

34.975 kW

31.2 kW

1.6 kW 2.3 kW 2.7 kW

P

DC2100%8212

Max. possible input power

26.3 kW 43.0 kW 62.2 kW

- Network operation is possible with 9342 or 9343. Since P

DCtotal is higher than P

DC100%934X

, the network requires a second supply. The selection of the regenerative power supply module is now only dependent on the regenerative power.

3. Determine the second input:

- Network with 9342: Second input at 9328

- Network with 9343: Second input at 9328 or 9325

8200SHB0199

10-13

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.4

Central supply

The DC-bus is supplied via a central supply source. Supply sources are:

-

DC source - 820X.

-

Supply and feedback module - 821X/822X/824X/93XX.

-

Controller with reserve power.

10.4.1

Central supply of 820X

+UG

-UG

PE

F4 F5 F4 F5

820xAB 820xAB

PE L1 N -UG +UG

820X

U V W

PE L1 N -UG +UG

820X

U V W

PE -UG +UG

Z3

FIG 10-2 Block diagram: Central supply of several 820X controllers connected to a network

F4, F5

Z3

820XAB

Fuses, DC level, see Accessories

Brake chopper/brake module, see Accessories

Current-limitation module, see Accessories

Stop!

For faultless network operation, the following conditions must be fulfilled in addition to the conditions described in chapter 10.2:

-

The voltage flow +U

G

“

PE / -U

G

“

PE must be symmetrical!

- The controller will be destroyed, if +U

G or -U

-

Use the current limitation module 820XAB.

G are grounded.

10-14

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.4.2

Central supply via 934X for 821X/822X/824X/93XX

K1

L1

L2

L3

N

PE

OFF

K1

ON

ϑ

Mot1

ϑ

Mot2

K1

F1...F3

Z1

L1 L2 L3

934X

Z2

PE +UG

F4 F5

-UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG

821X/ 822X

824X/ 93XX

PE U V W

L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG

821X/ 822X

824X/ 93XX

PE U V W

PE

M

3~

Mot1

M

3~

Mot2

PE

M

3~

FIG 10-3 Principle diagram: Central supply for network operation of 821X/822X/824X/93XX

Z1

Z2

Mains filter/choke

Regenerative power supply

F1 ... F5

K1

Fuses

Main contactor

Stop!

The DC-bus voltage thresholds of the 93XX controller and the 934X supply unit must be set to the same value.

Note!

Z2 is selected after balancing the power in the DC-bus. If the power supply of the supply is not sufficient, a parallel supply can be installed via the mains input of a controller (see Network of severval drives with decentral supply).

8200SHB0199

10-15

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.5

Decentral supply

The DC-bus is supplied via several controllers or supply units connected in parallel to the mains.

10.5.1

Decentral supply for 820X

L1

N/L2

PE

K10

K10*

F1 F1* F1 F1*

Z1 Z1* Z1 Z1*

F4 F5 F4 F5

PE L1 N -UG +UG

820X

U V W

PE L1 N -UG +UG

820X

U V W

PE -UG +UG

Z3

FIG 10-4 Block diagram: Decentral supply of several 820X controllers connected to a network

F1, F1*

K10, K10*

F4, F5

Z1, Z1*

Z3

Fuses, see Accessories

F1*only for supply voltage 2AC / PE / 190 - 260 V – 0 % / 45 - 65 Hz – 0 %

Mains contactor

K10*only for supply voltage 2AC / PE / 190 - 260 V – 0 % / 45 - 65 Hz – 0 %

Fuses, DC level, see Accessories

Mains choke/mains filter, see Accessories

Z1*only for supply voltage 2AC / PE / 190 - 260 V – 0 % / 45 - 65 Hz – 0 %

Brake chopper/brake module, see Accessories

Stop!

For faultless network operation, the following conditions must be fulfilled in addition to the conditions described in chapter 10.2:

-

In-phase connection on the mains side

-

With two-phase supply

- Cable and overload protection via second assigned mains fuse F1*

- Ensure current and power symmetry by providing a second mains choke/mains filter Z1*.

10-16

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10.5.2

Central supply for 821X/822X/824X/93XX/934X

821X/ 822X 824X/ 93XX

821X/ 822X 824X/ 93XX

FIG 10-5 Block diagram: Decentral supply of several controllers (821X/822X/824X/93XX/934X) connected to a network

Z2

Z3

Z4

F1, F2, F3

K10

F4, F5

Z1

Fuses, see Accessories

Mains contactor

Fuses, DC level, see Accessories

Mains choke/mains filter, see Accessories

Supply module

Brake unit, see Accessories

Brake resistor

8200SHB0199

10-17

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

10-18

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Network of several drives

See: Table of contents of the attached Operating

Instructions

8200SHB0199

10-19

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200D--G

00393452

Manual

Teil G

Application of brake units

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application of brake units

11 Application of brake units

See: Table of contents of the attached Operating Instructions

8200SHB0199 11-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application of brake units

11-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200D--H

00393453

Manual

Teil H

Automation

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Automation

12 Automation

See: Table of contents of the attached Operating Instructions

8200SHB0199 12-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--I

00406189

Manual

Part I

Accessories and motors

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13 Accessories (Survey)

A detailed description of the accessories and Lenze three-phase AC motors can be obtained from the corresponding catalogs.

13.1

Accessories for all types

Name

8201BB operating module

Diagnosis terminal (2.5 m cable)

Diagnosis terminal (5.0 m cable)

Diagnosis terminal (10 m cable)

Digital display

Setpoint potentiometer

Rotary button for potentiometer

Scale for potentiometer

RS232/485 fieldbus module

RS485 fieldbus module

Level converter for RS485

PC system cable RS232/485

Optical fibre fieldbus module

Optical fibre adaptor for PLC 0 ... 40 m

Supply unit for optical fibre adaptor 2125

INTERBUS module

PROFIBUS module

System bus module (CAN)

System bus module (CAN) with addressing

PTC module

I/O module

Monitor module

Bipolar setpoint module

Order number

EMZ8201BB

EMZ8272BB-V001

EMZ8272BB-V002

EMZ8272BB-V003

EPD203

ERPD0001k0001W

ERZ0001

ERZ0002

EMF2102IB-V001

EMF2102IB-V002

EMF2101IB

EWL0020

EMF2102IB-V003

EMF2125IB

EJ0013

EMF2111IB

EMF2131IB

EMF2171IB

EMF2172IB

EMZ8274IB

EMZ8275IB

EMZ8276IB

EMZ8278IB

13.2

Software

Name

PC program for Global Drive controllers

Order number

ESP-GDC 1

8200SHB0199

13-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13.3

Type-specific accessories

13.3.1

Types 820X

Name

E.l.c.b.

Fuse

Fuse holder

Mains filter type “A”

Mains choke

RFI filter for operation:

With mains choke

Without mains choke

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Swivel wall assembly

DIN-rail assembly

Fan for flat assembly

Current-limiting module

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8201

EFA1C10A

EFSM-0100ASB

EFH30001

EZN2-004A001

ELN1-0900H005

EZF1-006A002

EZF1-006A002

ELM3-030H003

EZS3-003A001

EMB8251-E

EJ0001

EJ0002

EJ0003

EMZ8201AB

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

8202

EFA1C16A

EFSM-0150ASB

EFH30001

Order number

8203

EFA1C20A

EFSM-0200ASC

EFH30001

EZN2-008A001

ELN1-0500H009

EZN2-013A001

ELN1-0350H014

EZF1-009A002

EZF1-009A002

ELM3-020H004

EZS3-004A002

EMB8251-E

EJ0001

EJ0002

EJ0003

EMZ8201AB

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

EZF1-018A002

EZF1-018A002

ELM3-010H010

EZS3-007A001

EMB8251-E

EJ0001

EJ0002

EJ0003

EMZ8203AB

EFSM-0100AWE

EFH10001

8204

EFA1C20A

EFSM-0200ASC

EFH30001

EZN2-017A001

ELN1-0160H017

EZF1-018A002 inadmissible

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-010A001

EMB8251-E

EJ0001

EJ0002

EJ0003

EMZ8203AB

EFSM-0160AWE

EFH10001

13-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13.3.2

Types 821X

E.l.c.b.

Fuse

Fuse holder

Mains filter type B

Mains choke

RFI filter

Operating with mains choke

Operation without mains choke

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Swivel wall assembly

DIN-rail assembly

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8211

EFA3B06A

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

EZN3B1500H003

ELN3-0700H003

EZF3-008A003

EZF3-008A003

ELM3-030H004

EZS3-002A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBM470R100W

EJ0001

EJ0002

EFSCC0063AYJ

EFH20004

E.l.c.b.

Fuse

Fuse holder

Mains filter type B

Mains choke

RFI filter

Operating with mains choke

Operation without mains choke

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Thermal separation

(”Push-through technique”)

Heat sink with assembly kit only for variant V003

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8215

EFA3B13A

EFSM-0160AWE

EFH10001

EZN3B0400H009

ELN3-0160H012

EZF3-016A003

EZF3-016A003

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-009A002

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBD100R600W

EJ0004

EJ0005

EFSCC0160AYJ

EFH20004

8212

EFA3B06A

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

Order number

8213

EFA3B10A

EFSM-0100AWE

EZN3B0800H004

ELN3-0450H004

EFH10001

EZN3B0750H005

ELN3-0350H006

EZF3-008A003

EZF3-008A003

ELM3-030H004

EZS3-004A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBM370R150W

EJ0001

EJ0002

EFSCC0063AYJ

EFH20004

EZF3-008A003

EZF3-008A003

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-006A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBM240R200W

EJ0001

EJ0002

EFSCC0080AYJ

EFH20004

8216

EFA3B20A

EFSM-0200AWE

EFH10001

Order number

8217

EFA3B25A

EFSM-0250AWH

EZN3B0300H013

ELN3-0160H012

EFH10001

EZN3B0250H015

ELN3-0120H017

EZF3-016A003

EZF3-024A001

ELM3-007H025

EZS3-013A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBD082R600W

EJ0004

EJ0005

EFSCC0200AYJ

EFH20004

EZF3-016A003

EZF3-024A001

ELM3-007H025

EZS3-017A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBD068R800W

EJ0004

EJ0005

EFSCC0320AYJ

EFH20004

8218

EFA3B32A

EFSM-0320AWH

EFH10001

EZN3B0150H024

ELN3-0120H025

EZF3-024A001 inadmissible

ELM3-007H025

EZS3-024A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBD047R01k2

EJ0004

EJ0005

EFSCC0400AYJ

EFH20004

8214

EFA3B10A

EFSM-0100AWE

EFH10001

EZN3B0500H007

ELN3-0250H007

EZF3-016A003 inadmissible

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-010A001

EMB8252-E

EMB8253-E

ERBD180R300W

EJ0001

EJ0002

EFSCC0120AYJ

EFH20004

8200SHB0199

13-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13.3.3

Types 822X

Name

Mains filter type A

Mains filter type B

Mains choke

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Thermal separation

(”Push-through technique”)

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8221

EZN3A0110A030

EZN3B0110A030

ELN3-088H035

ELM3-004H055 on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD033R02k0

EJ0011

EFSCC0500AYJ

EFH20004

8222

EZN3A0080A042

Order number

8223

EZN3A0060H054

EZN3B0080A042

ELN3-0075H045

ELM3-004H055 on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD022R03k0

EJ0011

EZN3B0060H054

ELN3-0055H055 on request on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD018R03k0

EJ0011

EFSCC0800AYJ

EFH20004

EFSCC1000AYJ

EFH20004

8224

ELN3-0038H085 on request on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E (2 x)

ERBD022R03k0 (2 x)

EJ0011

EFSCC0800AYJ (2 x)

EFH20004 (2 x )

Name

8225

Mains filter type A

Mains filter type B

Mains choke

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Thermal separation

(”Push-through technique”)

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

ELN3-0027H105 on request on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E (2 x )

ERBD018R03k0 (2 x)

EFSCC1000AYJ (2 x)

EFH20004 (2 x )

8226

Order number

ELN3-0022H130 on request on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E (3 x)

ERBD022R03k0 (3 x)

EFSCC0800AYJ (3 x)

EFH20004 (3 x)

8227

ELN3-0017H170 on request on request

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E (3 x)

ERBD018R03k0 (3 x)

EFSCC1000AYJ (3 x)

EFH20004 (3 x)

13-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13.3.4

Types 824X

Name

E.l.c.b.

Fuse

Fuse holder

Mains filter type A

Mains filter type B

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Thermal separation

(”Push-through technique”)

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8241

EFA3B06A

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

EZN3A2400H002

EZN3B2400H002

ELM3-030H004

EZS3-002A001

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD180R300W

EJ0036

EFSCC0060AYJ

EFH20004

Name

E.l.c.b.

Fuse

Fuse holder

Mains filter type A

Mains filter type B

Motor filter

Sine filter

Brake module

Brake chopper

Brake resistor

Thermal separation

(”Push-through technique”)

DC-bus fuse

Fuse holder

8245

EFA3B13A

EFSM-0160AWE

EFH10001

EZN3A0300H013

EZN3B0300H013

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-009A002

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD047R01k2

EJ0038

EFSCC0200AYJ

EFH20004

8242

EFA3B06A

EFSM-0060AWE

EFH10001

EZN3A1500H003

EZN3B1500H003

ELM3-030H004

EZS3-004A001

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD180R300W

EJ0036

Order number

8243

EFA3B10A

EFSM-0100AWE

EFH10001

EZN3A0900H004

EZN3B0900H004

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-006A001

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD082R600W

EJ0037

EFSCC0060AYJ

EFH20004

EFSCC0080AYJ

EFH20004

Order number

8246

EFA3B20A

EFSM-0200AWE

EFH10001

EZN3B0300H013

ELN3-0160H012

EZN3A0150H024

EZN3B0150H024

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD047R01k2

EJ0038

EFSCC0400AYJ

EFH20004

8244

EFA3B10A

EFSM-0100AWE

EFH10001

EZN3A0500H007

EZN3B0500H007

ELM3-014H010

EZS3-010A001

EMB9351-E

EMB9352-E

ERBD068R800W

EJ0037

EFSCC0120AYJ

EFH20004

8200SHB0199

13-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Accessories

13-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--K

00406190

Manual

Part K

Selection help

Application examples

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

14 Selection help will be added

Selection help

8200SHB0199

14-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Selection help

14-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

15 Application examples

15.1

Pump application with pressure control

Frequency inverter 8210/8220/8240

L 2101

Pressure setpoint e.g. from PC/PLC/ keypad

Analog display for actual pressure

Actual pressure

Fault message e.g. PLC

62

7

8

9

K11

K12

K14

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

Ctrl.

enable

Down

Up

JOG

H/RE

p

+

Pressure sensor

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

(external aux. energy/ supply required

Z2

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

Z1

Pump

K1

F1

PE L1L2L3

K35.0144_gba

FIG 15-1 Application of a pump with pressure control

Z1 Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Z2 Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions given in chapters 4.2

and 4.3.

8200SHB0199

15-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Exercise for FIG 15-1:

A centrifugal pump is used to ensure constant pressure in a pipeline system

(e.g. for water supply of residential and industrial premises).

The application does not only require remote control from a central operating panel but also setting possibilities at site. The pressure is to be reduced to a fixed value during times when only few water is required. Thus, indirectly possible burst pipes can be detected by monitoring the actual pressure.

Functions used

Internal PID controller for pressure control

- Regular control, setpoint selection via fieldbus with feedback via analog channel terminal 8.

-

Networking via fieldbus (e.g. via plug-in module 2102)

Manual/remote changeover (H/Re)

- Setpoint selection change via key ( E1 = DOWN / E2 = UP)

Process setpoint selection (e.g. pressure [p]) via inverter JOG value

-

Electrical controller inhibit (ctrl. enable)

15-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Code Name

Code settings:

C001 Operating mode

C005 Configuration

C007 Terminal configuration

C037 JOG value 1

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-3-

-0-7-

Setpoint selection - control, parameter setting via LECOM

Controlled operation, with analog feedback via term. 8

-0-26Motor potentiometer, JOG,

H/Re

20.00

16.67 HzFixed reduction to 1/3 of the rated pressure

Info

C051 Actual PID controller value Only display of actual pressure

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time PID controller

C072 Differential component PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C111 ¤ Monitor signal

1.00

100

0.0

0.0

-0-

0.02 ... 0.1

0.2 ... 1 s

0.0

100.0 %

-8Actual PID controller value

Adaptation to process

Inactive

C238 Frequency precontrol

C239 Frequency setting range

-1-

-0-

-0-

-1-

No precontrol

Unipolar Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos Ö ) depending on the motor connected.

In addition to the setpoint input via fieldbus, the pressure setpoint can also be selected via the 8201BB keypad

(installation up to max. 10 m away from the controller) or via an analog input signal (using the 8274 plug-in module).

Note!

For more detailed information on the process controller, see chapter

7.5.10.

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 7.6.3)

8200SHB0199

15-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

15.2

Pump application with level control

Water reservoir

L

Water level setpoint

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

7

8

STP

SH PRG

RUN

20

28

E1

39

Ctrl.

enable

Z2

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

+

-

Pressure sensor

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

(external aux. energy/ supply required

Delivery pump

Outlet

W

V

-U

U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Intake

Z1

K1

F1

PE L1 L2 L3

K35.0145_gba

FIG 15-2 Application of a pump with level control

Z1 Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Z2 Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions given in chapters 4.2

and 4.3.

15-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Application FIG 15-2:

In a tank the water is to be held at a constant level. The speed of the pump must be controlled depending on the amount of water delivered.

Functions used

-

Internal PID controller for level control.

- Regular control, analog setpoint input via terminal 8 with feedback via analog channel E1 with plug-in module 8279IB.

Code settings:

C005 Configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-6Operation with closed-loop control; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

-0-28- ... -45- or -48- ... -51-

Info

C007 ¤ Terminal configuration

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time

PID controller

C072 Differential component of PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C238 ¤ Frequency precontrol

C239 ¤ Frequency setting range

1.00

0.02 ... 0.1

100 0.2 ... 1 s

0.0

0.0

100.0 %

-1-0-

-0-1-

No precontrol

Unipolar

Act. level value via terminal E1

Adaptation to process

Inactive

Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller.

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos Ö ) depending on the motor connected.

Note!

-

Adapt C426 and C427 if the actual value input is 4 mA ... 20 mA.

(See chapter 3.7.1 and chapter 7.5.14.9)

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 7.6.3)

8200SHB0199

15-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

15.3

Dancer-position control (line drive)

L V

1

V

2

7

8

9

STP

SH PRG

RUN

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

20

28

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

Ctrl.

enable

QSP

JOG1

INFL_0

R1 Dancer potentiometer

1 ... 10 kOhm

5V E

S

R1

A

Main setpoint ~ V

1

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA

Z2

F

G

X1

W

V

U

M

3~

Z1

K1

F1

PE L1 L2 L3

FIG 15-3 Application of a dancer-position control

Z1 Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Z2 Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions in chapters 4.2 and 4.3.

15-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Code Name

Application FIG 15-3:

The material speed v

2 is to be synchronised to the line speed v

1 by means of a dancer-position control. The dancer-position setpoint is internally set.

Functions used

-

Internal PID controller as position controller.

-

Selection of the line speed v

1 via terminal 8.

Act. dancer position from the dancer potentiometer to the analog plug-in module 8279IB.

Code settings:

C005 Configuration

C007 Terminal configuration

Possible settings

Lenze Choice

-0-6Controlled operation; setpoint via terminal 8 with digital frequency feedback via terminal E1

Info

-0-49-

Jumper setting for terminal 8 must be adapted to 5 V (see chapter 4.2.8.2).

Actual dancer position via terminal E1

C037 JOG value 1 20.00

Fixed in-take speed v

1 for material guidance, individually adjustable

1.00

100

C070 Gain PID controller

C071 Integral action time PID controller

C072 Differential component PID controller

C074 Influence PID controller

C105 Deceleration time QSP

0.0

0.0

10.0 %

5.00

Enter approx. 1 s

C239 Frequency setting range -0-1Unipolar

Emergency-stop function:

The drive geometry must be adjusted so that it is possible to brake the controller to standstill within a very short time.

Direction of rotation cannot be changed via the process controller.

All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos Ö ) depending on the motor connected.

Note!

-

For more detailed information on the process controller, see chapter

7.5.10.

-

Calibration of the setpoints and actual values to the application datum under

C500 and C501.

(See chapter 7.6.3)

8200SHB0199

15-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

15.4

Air conditioning system

L1

L2

L3

8210/8220/8240 with 8201BB keypad

L

7

8

STP

SH PRG

RUN

Speed setpoint

Control

DCC

20

28

E3

39

Ctrl.

enable

X1

W

V

U

Unit 1

W

V

U

-U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Z2

M

3~

Belt

Condensation unit

7

8

SH PRG

STP

RUN

20

28

Speed setpoint

Control

DCC

Water injection

-

Circulating pump

Water filters

-

Ctrl.

enable

M

3~

39

W V U

X1

Unit 2

Z1

Z2

F1 K1

W

V

-U

U

G

+U

G

L3

L2

L1

Z1

Hot water

Cold water

Heat exchanger

FIG 15-4 Application example of an air conditioning system

Z1

Z2

Mains filter required for radio interference level A or B. For mains chokes see chapter 3.4 ff.

Motor filter/sine filter required for long motor cables or motors not designed for inverter operation

(see chapter 4.2.7.2).

Shield all signal and motor cables. Please observe the corresponding installation instructions given in chapters 4.2

and 4.3.

15-8

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Application FIG 15-4:

The air conditioning system of a department store is to be controlled according to the number of persons present. The fans must circulate an amount of air that depends on the number of people (e.g. data provided by a person counter).

Functions used

-

-

Belt monitoring

Mains failure detection

- Controlled deceleration and stopping of the drive after mains failure

-

-

-

Flying-restart circuit on coasting motor

Suppression of mechanical resonances

Smooth start/stop with S ramps

Code settings for unit 1:

C001

C2001

Operating mode

C005

C2005

Configuration

C008

C2008

Function relay K1

C014

C2014

C142

C2142

Control mode

Start condition

C156 Current threshold

C182 t integration

RFG S-shape

C625 Skip frequency 1

C628 Skipping bandwidth, f skip

C988 DC-bus voltage threshold for

DC-bus voltage control

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-0-

-0-0-

Setpoint selection via term. 8 (jumper setting see chapter 4.2.8.2)

Control via terminals parameter setting with 8201BB

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

-1-

-0-

-1-

-14Apparent motor current (C054) < Current threshold

-3-

-3-

C156 and acceleration finished (Belt monitoring)

Square characteristic V f d

2 with constant V min boost

Automatic start, if term. 28 HIGH, flying-restart circuit active

0

0.00

50 %

0.50 s Smooth start / stop

480.00

30.00 HzRemoval of mechanical resonances

0.00

10.00 %

0 81 % Controlled deceleration after mains failure by changing the parameter set

Info

Motor deceleration after mains failure

Parameter set changeover via DC-bus voltage control

PAR 1

C007 = 2

C105 = 0.5 s

PAR 2 (Code = C2XXX)

C2007 = 0

C2105 = 5.00 s

Note!

Terminal E3 must always be at L-level (PAR2: normal operation; PAR1: QSP)

8200SHB0199

15-9

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Application examples

Code settings for unit 2:

C001 Operating mode

C005 Configuration

C014 Control mode

Possible settings

Lenze

-0-

Choice

-0-

-0-

-0-

-0-

-3-

Setpoint selection via term. 8 (jumper setting see chapter 4.2.8.2)

Control via terminals parameter setting with

8201BB

Operation with open-loop control via terminal 8

Square characteristic V f d

2

V min boost with constant

Info

According to the information given in both tables (code setting for unit 1 and 2):

1. All other parameters are based on the factory setting.

2. Set the rated motor data under C088 (rated motor current) and C091 (motor cos Ö ) depending on the motor connected.

15-10

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--L

00406191

Manual

Part L

Signal-flow charts

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

16 Signal-flow charts blank

Signal flow charts

8200SHB0199

16-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.1

Signal-flow chart for types 820X

16.1.1

Control structure

V

REF

9

+ 5.2V

8

7

GND internal

50k 100k

Filter

A

D

8201BB

Operating unit

Setpoint serial interface

C046

0 - 20mA

4 - 20mA

Jumper

0 - 5V 0 - 10V

0,2

1

0 - 9

14 - 20

10 - 13

21 - 22

3

C001

Bedienungsart

Motor potentiometer

Constant

C007

UP

DOWN

0Hz

0 4

0

1

20

C034

Offset fdmin C010 fdmax C011

00

C038

01

C037

10

C039

11

0Hz

JOG 1

JOG 2

Setpoint selection

QSP

DC brake

UP

DOWN fdset

Vmin

C016

Autoboost

Calculation of voltage

Vmin

C016

2.3

0.1

C056

C014

Control mode

Ramp function generator

Ctrl. enable

DC brake

C036

VDC br.

0.2

fd = 0Hz

1.3

+

+

Vz - comp.

Motor voltage

C052

C015 V/f ref. point

C014 V/f characteristic

Inverter fdset

+ fd act fd

C050

+

C011 C011 fdmax

C012

C013

C021

Slip compensation

C022

C023 fd = 0Hz

C056 0.1 Hz

U

V

W

C054

Motor current IMot [A]

(act. value)

C056 Load display [%] fd = fdset fdset

0.1 Hz

Qmin reached fdmax

128

FIG 16-1 Signal flow 8200: Control structure

16-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.1.2

Inverter control

Ctrl. enable

Control signals

28

Reset

TRIP Reset

Start/Stop Logic

Operating unit

S

R

Terminals

Ctrl. enable

E1

E2

E3

E4

Selection

JOG 1

JOG 2

L/R

GSB

PAR

EXT_TRIP

QSP

UP

DOWN

L

R

39

C007 fd = 0Hz

Switch-off delay

GND extern

Terminal configuration

FIG 16-2 820X signal flow: Inverter control

DC brake

T

C106

≥1

Auto-DC brake function

IMP

16.1.3

Monitorings

Load

C056

I 2 x t - switch off t

=0

>0 inactive

OC6

Motor overload

C120 fd act

Load

C056

Imot

C054

V

Z fmax

0 200

0

1

Monitor signal

2...6V

62

C108

GND internal

7

2

3

2 IN

C111

400V

FIG 16-3 Signal flow 820X: Monitorings

Ready for operation

TRIP

Motor is running

Motor CW rotation

3

4

Motor CCW rotation

2

5 fd = 0

1

6 fd = fset

0

7

Qmin reached

8

Imax

9

Warning overtemperature

10

TRIP, Qmin or IMP

C008

Relay output

K12

K11

K14

8200SHB0199

16-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.2

Signal-flow charts for types 821X/822X/824X

16.2.1

Control structure control mode V/f control

V

REF

9

+ 5,2V

8

50k 100k

A

D

0 4

0

1

20

8201BB

Operating unit

Setpoint serial interface

C046

7

GND internal

Filter

C034

Offset fdmin C010 fdmax C011

0 - 20mA

4 - 20mA

Jumper

0 - 5V 0 - 10V

Operating mode

0,2

1

3

C001

11

Konstant

10

UP

01

DOWN

00

QSP

Terminal config.

0 - 9

14 - 20

10 - 13

21 - 22

Motor potentiometer

Setpoint selection

00

C038

01

C037

10

C039

11

C007

JOG 1

JOG 2

JOG 3

CW

CCW x + 1

0Hz

QSP

DC brake

UP

DOWN

Voltage calculation Vz - comp.

Inverter

Vmin

C016

2;3

4

Motor voltage

C052

+

+

QSP

Ctrl. enable

DC brake fd soll

C012

C013

C105

C014 C036 fd < Qmin

VDC brake

V/f-ref. point

C015

V/fcharacteristic

C014

0;2

1;3

- motor mode

+ gen. mode

+

Slip compensation

+

C011 fdmax

Ramp function generator

Chopper frequency

C144

0

1

2

3

4

5

C018 fd act

C050 fd

- gen. mode

+ motor mode C011

C021

Slip

C056 compensation. [%] +

Motor current evaluation -

Imax controller

C054 C056

Motor current [A]

(act. value)

Load display [%] fd = 0Hz

0.1 Hz

Limit value motor mode C022

Limit value gen. mode C023

U

V

W fd = fd set fd set

Qmin

C017

Qmin

Qmin reached

(Hysteresis = )

128

FIG 16-4 Signal flow 821X/822X/824X: Control structure control mode V/f-control

16-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.2.2

Control structure control mode motor current control

8201BB

Operating unit

Setpoint serial interface

V

REF

9

+ 5,2V

8

7

GND internal

C046

50k 100k

A

D

0 4

0

1

20

Filter

C034

Offset fdmin C010 fdmax C011

0 - 20mA

4 - 20mA

Jumper

0 - 5V 0 - 10V

Operating mode

0,2

1

3

C001

11

Constant

10

UP

01

DOWN

00

QSP

Terminal config.

0 - 9

14 - 20

10 - 13

21 - 22

Motor potentiometer

Setpoint selection

00

C038

01

C037

10

C039

11

C007

JOG 1

JOG 2

JOG 3

CW

CCW x + 1

0Hz

QSP

DC brake

UP

DOWN

Ramp function generator

QSP

Ctrl. enable

DC brake fd set

C012

C013

C105

C011 fdmax

V/f ref. point

C015

Rated motor current C088

Motor cos C091

C144

Chopper frequency

3

4

5

0

1

2

Motor

model.

Motor voltage

C052

V

C036

VDC brake fdact

C018

0Hz

Vz - comp.

DC brake /

Auto DC brake

C011

-

Limit value motor mode C022

Limit value generator mode

C023 n-controller M-controller

-

+ +

+

C050 fd

C021

Slip comp.

Inverter

Motor current evaluation

0.1 Hz fd = 0Hz Motor current [A]

(Act. value)

C054 fd = fd set C056

Load display [%] fd set

Qmin

C017

Qmin

Qmin reached

(Hysteresis = )

128

U

V

W

FIG 16-5 Signal-flow 821X/822X/824X: Control structure control mode motor current control

8200SHB0199

16-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.2.3

Inverter control

Ctrl. enable

28

Control signals

E1

E2

E3

E4

39

Terminal config.

GND external

Auswahl

Reset

TRIP Reset

JOG 1

JOG 2

CW/CCW

CCW

DC brake

PAR

EXT_TRIP

CW

QSP

UP

DOWN

Start/Stop logic

Terminals

C019

Operating unit

STP

RUN

DC brake

T

Ctrl. enable

>1

Switch-off delay

C106

C007

Auto DC brake fd < C019

C106 = 0

FIG 16-6 821X/822X/824X signal flow: Inverter control

IMP

16.2.4

Monitorings

PTC evaluation

(only with 822X/824X)

Load

C056

T1

T2 t

2

I x t - switch off

C119

=0

>0 inactive

Trip + IMP

Warning inactive

OC6

Motoroverload

C120

Ready for operation

TRIP

Motor is running

Motor CW rotation

MotorCCW rotation fd = 0 fd = fset

Qmin reached

Imax

Warning Overtemperature

TRIP, Qmin or IMP

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

8

9

10

C008

Relay output K1

K12

K11

K14 fd act fmax

Load

C056

Imot

C054

0 200

2

3

0

1

2...6V

Monitor signal

62

C108

GND internal

7

2x IN

C111

V

Z

1000V

FIG 16-7 Signal-flow 821X/822X/824X: Monitorings

Ready for operation

TRIP

Motor is running

Motor CW rotation

Motor CCW rotation fd = 0 fd = fset

Qmin reached

Imax

Warning Overtemperature

TRIP, Qmin or IMP

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

10

11

8

9

PTC

C117

Relay output K2

(only with 822X/824X)

K22

K21

K24

16-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.3

Signal-flow charts for types 821X/822X/824X-HVAC

16.3.1

Process and speed controller for C005 = -0-

FIG 16-8 Process and speed controller for C005 = -0-

K35.0147

8200SHB0199

16-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Signal flow charts

16.3.2

Process and speed controller for C005 = -1- ... -7-

LU

Im

16-8

8200SHB0199

FIG 16-9 Process and speed controller for C005 = -1- ... -7-

K35.0134

Show/Hide Bookmarks

EDS8200U--M

00406192

Manual

Part M

Glossary

Table of keywords

=

Global Drive

Frequency inverters 8200

Show/Hide Bookmarks

This Manual is valid for 82XX controllers as of version:

33.820X-

33.8202-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.821X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.822X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

33.824X-

2x

3x

1x

2x

3x

0x

1x

3x

1x

1x

1x

2x

1x.

3a.

0x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

3a.

1x.

1x.

0x.

1x.

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

C-

E-

E-

E-

E-

E-

-V002

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

-V003

-V020

Type

Design:

B = Module

C = Cold plate

E = Built-in unit IP20

Hardware version and index

Software version and index

Variant

Explanation

(8201 - 8204)

Reduced assembly depth (8202)

(8211 - 8218)

(8211 - 8218)

Cold plate (8215 - 8218)

HVAC (8211 - 8218)

(8221 - 8227)

Cold plate (8221 - 8222)

HVAC (8221 - 8227)

(8241 - 8246)

Cold plate (8241 - 8246)

HVAC (8241 - 8246)

Edition of: 01/1999 revised

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Glossary

17 Glossary

Term

AIF

CAN

CE

Code

Ctrl. enable

Ctrl. inhibit

Fieldbus

FPDA

FPDE

GDC

RFG

INTERBUS

JOG

Target position

LECOM

LEMOC2

LU

Master

OU

PC

P

DC

PM

PROFIBUS

Process data

QSP

Slave

PLC

Meaning

Automation interface (X1)

Controller Area Network

Communauté Européenne (English: European Community)

For entry and display (access) of parameter values

Variable addressing according to the format ”code/subcode” (Cxxxx/xx)

All variables can be addressed via the code digits.

Controller enable

Controller inhibit ( = Controller enable)

For data exchange between superimposed control and positioning control, e.g. INTERBUS or PROFIBUS

Freely programmable digital output

Freely programmable digital input

Global Drive Control (PC-program (Windows) for Lenze controllers)

Ramp generator

Industrial communication standard to DIN E19258

Fixed speed or input for fixed speed

The target which is to be approached by means of a defined traversing profile

Lenze Communication

PC-program (DOS) for Lenze controllers

Undervoltage

Masters are host systems, e.g. PLC or PC.

Overvoltage

Personal Computer

This power can be additionally obtained from the DC bus when operating a matching motor.

Permanent magnet

Communication standard DIN 19245, consisting of part 1, part 2 and part 3

For instance, setpoints and actual values of controllers which must be exchanged within a minimum of time

Process data are usually small amounts of data which are to be transmitted cyclically.

For PROFIBUS, these data are transmitted in the logic process data channel.

Quick stop

Bus device which may only send after the request of the master. Controllers are slaves.

Programmable logic controller

8200SHB0199

17-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Glossary

17-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

18 Table of keywords

A

AC-motor braking: Part D 7-12

Acceleration times: Part C 5-4; Part D 7-16

Accessory kit: Part A 1-1

Actual value, Digital supply: Part D 7-60

Aggressive gases: Part B 4-1

Analog output: Part D 7-69

Analog plug-in module

Assembly: Part B 4-24

Features: Part B 3-24

Technical data: Part B 3-24

Application as directed: Part A 1-3

Application conditions: Part B 3-4

Application datum, Display: Part C 5-15; Part D

7-63

Application examples: Part K 15-1

Air conditioning: Part K 15-8

Air conditioning system: Part C 5-26

Dancer position control: Part C 5-23; Part K 15-6

For PID controllers: Part C 5-18

Pump with level control: Part C 5-21; Part K 15-4

Pump with pressure control: Part C 5-18; Part K

15-1

Approvals: Part B 3-4

Assembly: Part B 4-1

Analog plug-in module: Part B 4-24

Cold plate technique

Demands on the cooler: Part B 4-15

Fields of application: Part B 4-14

Preparations: Part B 4-17

Thermal performance: Part B 4-16

Types 821X: Part B 4-18

Types 822X: Part B 4-21

Types 824X: Part B 4-22

DIN-rail

Types 820X: Part B 4-8

Types 821X: Part B 4-9

Thermally separated: Part B 4-10

Types 821X: Part B 4-11

Types 822X: Part B 4-12

Types 824X: Part B 4-13

Variant with reduced assembly depth, Type

8202-V002: Part B 4-3

With fixing brackets, Types 824X: Part B 4-7

With fixing rails

Types 820X: Part B 4-3

Types 821X: Part B 4-4

With mains filter: Part B 4-23

Asynchronous standard motors: Part A 1-3

Auto-TRIP reset: Part E 8-4

B

Bar-graph display: Part D 7-3

Brake unit: Part B 4-34

C

Cable cross-section, Network of several drives: Part

F 10-6

Cable cross-sections: Part B 4-29

Control cables: Part B 4-38

DC-bus: Part F 9-4

Max. permissible: Part B 4-28

Single drives: Part B 3-21

120 % overload: Part B 3-23

150 % overload: Part B 3-22

Cable specification: Part B 4-27

CE mark: Part A 1-4

Central supply. See Network of several drives

Changeover, Manual/remote operation: Part D 7-59

Chopper frequency derating: Part D 7-30

Chopper frequency of inverter: Part D 7-29

Noise optimised: Part D 7-29

Cleaning: Part E 9-1

Code: Part D 7-1

Code level: Part D 7-4

Code table

Explanation: Part D 7-77, 7-85

HVAC series: Part D 7-85

Standard series: Part D 7-77

Cold Plate

Demands on the cooler: Part B 4-15

Fields of application: Part B 4-14

Max. temperature of heat sink: Part B 4-15

Variant: Part B 4-14

8200SHB0199 18-1

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

Cold plate, Thermal resistance: Part B 4-15

Commissioning: Part C 5-1

Condensation: Part C 5-1

Configuration: Part D 7-1

Accleration and deceleration times: Part C 5-4; Part

D 7-16

Analog output: Part D 7-69

Basics: Part D 7-1

Change of the direction of rotation: Part D 7-54

Chopper frequency of inverter: Part D 7-29

Code: Part D 7-1

Code table: Part D 7-77, 7-85

Control functions: Part D 7-15

Control mode: Part D 7-19

Controller enable: Part D 7-48

Current limit values: Part C 5-5; Part D 7-17

Current limitation controller: Part D 7-18

DC-injection brake (DCB): Part D 7-56

Digital inputs: Part D 7-50

Display functions: Part D 7-62

Level inversion: Part D 7-52

Manual / remote operation: Part D 7-59

Maximum field frequency: Part C 5-3; Part D 7-15

Minimum field frequency: Part C 5-3; Part D 7-15

Monitoring functions: Part D 7-65

Motor data detection: Part D 7-27

Operating functions: Part D 7-9

Oscillation damping: Part D 7-31

Parameter set changeover (PAR): Part D 7-58

Parameters: Part D 7-1

Priority mask: Part D 7-53

Quick stop (QSP): Part D 7-55

Relay outputs: Part D 7-65

Setpoint input: Part D 7-40

Signal-flow charts: Part L 16-1

Slip compensation: Part D 7-28

Start conditions/flying-restart circuit: Part D 7-49

Thermal motor monitoring: Part D 7-71

TRIP set: Part D 7-58

V/f-rated frequency: Part D 7-22

Vmin setting: Part D 7-24

Connection

Analog plug-in module: Part B 4-42

Brake unit: Part B 4-34

Control, Connection diagram: Part B 4-41

Control cables: Part B 4-38

Mains: Part B 4-28

Motor: Part B 4-29

Power

Connection diagram 820X: Part B 4-35

Connection diagram 821X: Part B 4-36

Connection diagram 822X/824X: Part B 4-37

Temperature monitoring: Part B 4-41

Connection diagram

Control connections: Part B 4-41

Analog plug-in module: Part B 4-42

Power connection 820X: Part B 4-35

Power connection 821X: Part B 4-36

Power connection 822X/824X: Part B 4-37

Connections, Power: Part B 4-28

Control cables: Part B 4-38

Control connections: Part B 4-38

Control functions: Part D 7-15

Control mode: Part D 7-19

Permissible: Part B 4-32; Part C 5-6

Control terminals: Part B 4-38

Max. permissible cross-sections, For motor connection: Part B 4-38

Overview: Part B 4-38

Protection against polarity reversal: Part B 4-39

Terminal assignment: Part B 4-38

Controlled deceleration in the event of mains failure:

Part D 7-13

Controller

Application as directed: Part A 1-3

Identification: Part A 1-3

Protection: Part B 4-26

Controller enable: Part D 7-48

Controllers: Part A 1-1

Cooling air: Part B 4-1

Current limitation controller: Part D 7-18

Current limits: Part C 5-5; Part D 7-17

Controller not active: Part D 7-17

Earth-fault detection: Part D 7-17

18-2

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

D

DC-bus, Cable cross-section: Part F 9-4

DC-bus fuse: Part F 9-5

DC-injection brake: Part D 7-56

Deceleration times: Part C 5-4; Part D 7-16

Decentral supply. See Network of several drives

Definitions: Part A 1-1

Degree of pollution: Part B 3-4

Derating: Part C 5-5; Part D 7-17, 7-29, 7-31

Digital inputs: Part D 7-50

Dimensions

8202-V002 reduced assembly depth: Part B 4-3

820X on DIN rails: Part B 4-8

820X with fixing rails: Part B 4-3

821X on DIN rails: Part B 4-9

821X thermally separated: Part B 4-11

821X with fixing rails: Part B 4-4

821X-V003 cold plate: Part B 4-18

822X thermally separated: Part B 4-12

822X-V003 cold plate: Part B 4-21

824X thermally separated: Part B 4-13

824X with fixing brackets: Part B 4-7

824X-V003 cold plate: Part B 4-22

Analog plug-in module: Part B 3-25

Controllers: Part B 3-25

With mains filter: Part B 4-23

Direction of rotation

Failsafe change: Part D 7-54

Not failsafe change: Part D 7-54

Display

Application datum: Part C 5-15; Part D 7-63

Bar-graph: Part D 7-3

LCD: Part D 7-3

LED: Part C 6-2; Part E 8-1

Operating module: Part D 7-2

Operating status: Part C 6-2; Part E 8-1

Operating time/mains connection time: Part D 7-64

Software version/controller type: Part D 7-64

Status: Part D 7-3

Display functions: Part D 7-62

Application datum: Part D 7-63

Elapsed operating time meter: Part D 7-64

Possible values: Part D 7-62

Software version/controller type: Part D 7-64

Switch-on display: Part D 7-62

Display values: Part D 7-62

Disposal: Part A 1-3

Drive parameters, Factory setting: Part C 5-2

Drive performance, Influence of the motor cable length: Part B 4-32

Drive system: Part A 1-1

E

Earth fault, Detection: Part D 7-17

EC Directives: Part A 1-4

Electromagnetic compatibility: Part A 1-7

CE-typical drive system: Part A 1-8

Declaration of conformity: Part A 1-9

Standards considered: Part A 1-9

Low Voltage: Part A 1-5

Declaration of conformity: Part A 1-6

Standards considered: Part A 1-6

Machinery: Part A 1-11

Manufacturer’s Declaration: Part A 1-12

Elapsed operating time meter: Part D 7-64

Electrical installation: Part B 4-25

Important notes: Part B 4-25

EMC

Assembly: Part B 4-43

CE-typical drive system, Installation: Part B 4-43

Filters: Part B 4-43

Grounding: Part B 4-44

Installation: Part B 4-43

Screening: Part B 4-44

Emergency switch-off: Part C 6-1

Enclosure: Part B 3-4

F

Factory setting: Part D 7-5

Important drive parameters: Part C 5-2

Short commissioning: Part C 5-2

Switch-on sequence: Part C 5-2

Fans, Application 82XX: Part B 3-18

FAST-ON connector: Part B 4-29

Fault analysis: Part E 8-2

Fault elimination: Part E 8-1

Fault indication, Reset: Part E 8-4

8200SHB0199 18-3

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

Fault message, External: Part D 7-58

Fault messages: Part E 8-2

Features: Part B 3-2

Field frequency

Maximum: Part C 5-3; Part D 7-15

Minimum: Part C 5-3; Part D 7-15

Fieldbus module

Change/store parameters: Part D 7-8

INTERBUS: Part D 7-8

RS232/RS485: Part D 7-8

System bus (CAN): Part D 7-8

Flying-restart circuit: Part C 6-1; Part D 7-49

Free space for assembly: Part B 4-1

Frequency, Skipping: Part D 7-33

Frequency input, Digital: Part D 7-60

Frequency inverters. See Controllers

Frequency precontrol: Part D 7-39

Frequency setting range: Part D 7-39

Fuses

In UL-approved systems: Part B 3-21

Mains connection: Part B 4-29

Network of several drives: Part F 10-6

Single drives: Part B 3-21

120 % overload: Part B 3-23

150 % overload: Part B 3-22

G

General data: Part B 3-4

Glossary: Part M 16-1

See Glossary

H

Heat-conducting paste: Part B 4-17

History buffer: Part E 8-2

Assembly: Part E 8-2

Humidity class: Part B 3-4

I

Identification, Controller: Part A 1-3

Inital switch-on: Part C 5-1

Initial-current limitation: Part C 6-1

Inputs

Analog: Part B 4-40

Digital: Part B 4-40; Part D 7-50 digital, Response times: Part D 7-50

PTC: Part D 7-72

Installation

CE-typical drive system: Part B 4-43

Assembly: Part B 4-43

Filters: Part B 4-43

Grounding: Part B 4-44

Screening: Part B 4-44

Electrical: Part B 4-25

Mechanical: Part B 4-1

Installation height: Part B 3-4

Insulation: Part B 4-25

Insulation strength: Part B 3-4

INTERBUS: Part D 7-8

Interface

LECOM: Part D 7-8

RS232/RS485: Part D 7-8

J

JOG frequencies: Part D 7-43

Jumper

Analog setpoint input: Part D 7-40

Analog setpoint selection: Part B 4-40

K

Keypad, Setpoint input: Part D 7-42

L

LECOM: Part D 7-8

Legal regulations: Part A 1-3

Lenze convection coolers

Assembly in the control cabinet: Part B 4-18

Wall mounting: Part B 4-20

Level inversion: Part D 7-52

Liability: Part A 1-3

Light emitting diode: Part C 6-2; Part E 8-1

18-4

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

M

Mains conditions: Part B 4-27

Mains connection: Part B 4-28

Protection: Part B 4-29

Mains connection and disconnection, Cyclic: Part C

6-1

Mains connection time: Part D 7-64

Mains types: Part B 4-27

Mains voltage compensation: Part C 5-10, 5-12;

Part D 7-22

Maintenance: Part E 9-1

Maloperation of the drive: Part E 8-2

Manual operation: Part D 7-59

Manufacturer: Part A 1-3

Max. temperature: Part B 4-15

Mechanical installation: Part B 4-1

Messages, Fault: Part E 8-2

Monitor output: Part B 4-40; Part D 7-69

Monitoring, Motor temperature: Part B 4-40

Monitoring functions: Part D 7-65

Motor

Adaptation: Part C 5-6

Thermal monitoring

Sensorless: Part D 7-71

With PTC resistor: Part D 7-72

Motor adaptation: Part C 5-6

Motor cable

Influence of the length: Part B 4-32

Screening: Part B 4-29

Motor cables, Protection: Part B 3-21

Motor connection: Part B 4-29

Types 822X: Part B 4-30

Types 824X: Part B 4-31

Motor data detection: Part D 7-27

Motor monitoring: Part D 7-71

Motor potentiometer: Part D 7-44, 7-46

Motor protection: Part B 4-26

Motor-current control: Part D 7-20

Motor, Phase failure: Part D 7-73

Phase, Failure detection: Part D 7-73

Mounting positions

Types 820X: Part B 4-2

Types 8211-8214: Part B 4-2

Types 8215-8218: Part B 4-2

Types 822X/824X: Part B 4-2

N

Network of several drives: Part F 9-1

Central supply: Part F 10-14

820X: Part F 10-14

821X/822X/824X/93XX: Part F 10-15

Conditions: Part F 9-2

DC-bus connection: Part F 9-4

Decentral supply: Part F 10-16

820X: Part F 10-16

821X/822X/824X/93XX: Part F 10-17

Filter assignment: Part F 10-11

Function: Part F 9-1

Mains connection: Part F 9-3

Possible combinations: Part F 9-2

Protection concept: Part F 10-7

Selection basics: Part F 10-9

Several drives: Part F 9-1

Supply power: Part F 10-10

Noise emission: Part B 3-4

Noise immunity: Part B 3-4

Noise optimised operation: Part D 7-29

Normalisation, Application datum: Part C 5-15

O

ONLINE: Part D 7-5

Operating functions: Part D 7-9

Operating information: Part C 6-1

Operating level: Part D 7-4

Operating mode: Part D 7-9

Operating module

Bar-graph display: Part D 7-3

Change/store parameters: Part D 7-6

Fault indication: Part E 8-1

Functions: Part D 7-2

Key functions: Part D 7-3

LCD display: Part D 7-3

Parameter transfer: Part D 7-2

Status display: Part D 7-3

8200SHB0199 18-5

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

Operating program: Part D 7-4

Code level: Part D 7-4

Operating level: Part D 7-4

Parameter level: Part D 7-5

Operating status, Display: Part C 6-2; Part E 8-1

Operating time: Part D 7-64

Operation

Noise optimised: Part D 7-29

Status display: Part C 6-2; Part E 8-1

Operator’s safety: Part A 2-2; Part B 4-25

Oscillation damping: Part D 7-31

Reduction of speed oscillations: Part D 7-31

Oscillations: Part B 4-1

Output, Analog: Part D 7-69

Outputs, Analog: Part B 4-40

Overspeed: Part C 6-1

Overspeeds: Part A 2-2

Overview of types: Part B 3-1

P

Packaging: Part B 3-4

Parameter: Part D 7-1

Absolute: Part D 7-5

Change: Part D 7-5

Dynamic: Part D 7-8

Change ONLINE: Part D 7-6

Change when the controller is inhibited: Part D 7-7

Change with acknowledgement: Part D 7-6

Change/store with the fieldbus module: Part D 7-8

Change/store with the operating module: Part D 7-6

Relative: Part D 7-5

Store: Part D 7-5

Types: Part D 7-5

Parameter level: Part D 7-5

Parameter set changeover

AC-motor braking: Part D 7-12

Controlled deceleration in the event of mains failure:

Part D 7-13

Parameter sets: Part D 7-5

Changeover via terminal PAR: Part D 7-58

Dynamical storage: Part D 7-8

Working with: Part D 7-10

Parameter setting, Flow chart: Part D 7-4

Parameter transfer: Part D 7-2

Parameters: Part D 7-5

PID controller: Part C 5-16; Part D 7-34

Air conditioning system: Part C 5-26; Part K 15-8

Application examples: Part C 5-18

Dancer position control: Part C 5-23; Part K 15-6

Integral component, Reset: Part D 7-38

Pump with level control: Part C 5-21; Part K 15-4

Pump with pressure control: Part C 5-18; Part K

15-1

Setpoint input: Part D 7-38

Setpoint precontrol: Part D 7-39

Setting: Part D 7-34

Influence: Part D 7-38

PM synchronous motors: Part A 1-3

Power connections: Part B 4-28

Max. permissible cross-sections: Part B 4-28

Priority mask: Part D 7-53

Protection against contact: Part B 4-25, 4-38

Protection against polarity reversal: Part B 4-39

Protection of controller: Part B 4-26

Protection of devices: Part A 2-2

PTC input: Part D 7-72

Pulse inhibit: Part D 7-66, 7-68

Pumps, Application of 82XX: Part B 3-18

Push-through technique: Part B 4-10

Q

Quick stop: Part D 7-55

R

R.c.c.b.: Part B 4-25

Rated data

Types 8201-8204, 150 % overload: Part B 3-5

Types 8211-8214, 150 % overload: Part B 3-6

Types 8215-8218, 150 % overload: Part B 3-8

Types 821X, 120 % overload: Part B 3-18

Types 8221-8224, 150 % overload: Part B 3-10

Types 8225-8227, 150 % overload: Part B 3-12

Types 822X, 120 % overload: Part B 3-19

Types 8241-8243, 150 % overload: Part B 3-14

Types 8244-8246, 150 % overload: Part B 3-16

Types 824X, 120 % overload: Part B 3-20

Relay output: Part B 4-40

18-6

8200SHB0199

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

Relay outputs: Part D 7-65

Reluctance motors: Part A 1-3

Remote operation: Part D 7-59

Reset, Fault indication: Part E 8-4

Residual hazards: Part A 2-2

Residual-current operated protective devices: Part B

4-25

Response times of digital inputs: Part D 7-50

Running optimisation: Part D 7-28

S

Safety information: Part A 2-1

For controllers to Low-Voltage Directive: Part A 2-1

Layout: Part A 2-2

Other notes: Part A 2-2

Warning of damage to material: Part A 2-2

Warning of danger to persons: Part A 2-2

Scope of delivery: Part A 1-1

Screen sheet: Part B 4-38

Screening

Control cables: Part B 4-38

EMC: Part B 4-44

Motor cable: Part B 4-29

Service addresses: Part E 9-2

Setpoint input: Part D 7-40, 7-41

Analog: Part D 7-40

Jumper position: Part D 7-40

Digital: Part D 7-60

Inverse: Part D 7-41

PID controller: Part D 7-38

Using the keypad: Part D 7-42

Via JOG frequencies: Part D 7-43

Via motor potentiometer: Part D 7-44

Via motor potentiometer and JOG: Part D 7-46

Setpoint precontrol: Part D 7-39

Setpoint sum: Part D 7-47

Short commissioning: Part C 5-2

Signal-flow charts: Part L 16-1

820X: Part L 16-2

821X/822X/824X: Part L 16-4

HVAC: Part L 16-7

Motor current control: Part L 16-5

V/f-control: Part L 16-4

Skip frequency: Part D 7-33

Slip compensation: Part D 7-28

Software, Operating programs: Part D 7-8

Software version: Part D 7-64

Special motors, Operation of: Part D 7-31

Speed oscillations: Part D 7-31

Start options: Part D 7-49

Switch-on, Initial: Part C 5-1

Switch-on display: Part D 7-62

Switch-on sequence, Factory setting: Part C 5-2

Switching on the motor side: Part B 4-31

Switching units: Part B 4-33

System bus module: Part D 7-8

T

Technical data: Part B 3-1

Analog plug-in module: Part B 3-24

Features: Part B 3-24

Controller features: Part B 3-2

General data/application conditions: Part B 3-4

Overview of types: Part B 3-1

Temperature monitoring: Part B 4-41

Temperature range: Part B 3-4

Thermal monitoring, Motor

Sensorless: Part D 7-71

With PTC resistor: Part D 7-72

Thermal resistance: Part B 4-15

Thermal separation: Part B 4-10

Tightening torques

Control terminals: Part B 4-38

Power terminals: Part B 4-28, 4-31

Torque, Indirect limitation: Part D 7-61

Transport, storage: Part A 2-1

TRIP: Part E 8-4

TRIP set: Part D 7-58

8200SHB0199 18-7

Show/Hide Bookmarks

Table of keywords

Troubleshooting: Part E 8-1

Display at the operating module: Part E 8-1

Fault analysis with the history buffer: Part E 8-2

Fault message reset: Part E 8-4

Fault messages: Part E 8-2

LED display: Part E 8-1

Maloperation of the drive: Part E 8-2

TRIP: Part E 8-4

Type: Part D 7-64

U

Use, As directed: Part A 1-3

V

V/f characteristic: Part D 7-22

V/f-characteristic control

Auto boost: Part D 7-22

With auto boost: Part D 7-19

With Vmin boost: Part D 7-20

V/f-rated frequency: Part D 7-22

87 Hz technique: Part D 7-23

Variant

821X-V003: Part B 4-18

822X-V003: Part B 4-21

824X-V003: Part B 4-22

Cold Plate: Part B 4-14

V002: Part B 4-3

V003: Part B 4-14

Vibration resistance: Part B 3-4

Vibrations: Part B 4-1

Vmin setting: Part D 7-24

Drives with special motors: Part C 5-11; Part D

7-24

Voltage drop: Part B 4-29

W

Warranty: Part A 1-3

18-8

8200SHB0199

advertisement

Key Features

  • Frequency inverter with IP20 rating
  • Advanced motor control algorithms for precise and efficient operation
  • Built-in PLC functionality for flexible programming and control
  • Integrated safety features for enhanced protection
  • Communication options for easy integration into industrial networks
  • Rugged construction for harsh industrial environments

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the power range of the Lenze 8246?
The Lenze 8246 is available in power ranges from 0.37 kW to 160 kW.
What is the voltage range of the Lenze 8246?
The Lenze 8246 is available in voltage ranges from 115V to 690V.
What is the enclosure rating of the Lenze 8246?
The Lenze 8246 has an IP20 enclosure rating.
What is the mounting type of the Lenze 8246?
The Lenze 8246 is designed for wall mounting.
Download PDF

advertisement